TW202314563A - Occupant-centered predictive control of devices in facilities - Google Patents

Abstract

In various embodiments, methods, systems, software, and apparatuses for controlling devices of a facility are provided, e.g., based on user input and/or user preferences.

Description

Occupant-centric predictive control of equipment in a facility

Cross-reference to related applications

This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/240,117, filed September 2, 2021, entitled "OCCUPANT-CENTERED PREDICTIVE CONTROL OF DEVICES IN FACILITIES," the entirety of which is hereby incorporated by reference for all purposes way incorporated into this article. This application is part of the continuation of the international patent application No. PCT/US21/27418 filed on April 15, 2021 with the title of invention "INTERACTION BETWEEN AN ENCLOSURE AND ONE OR MORE OCCUPANTS", which claims Priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/080,899 filed on September 21, 2020, titled "INTERACTION BETWEEN BETWEEN AN ENCLOSURE AND ONE OR MORE OCCUPANTS", and filed on July 16, 2020, titled Priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/052,639 for "INDIRECT INTERACTIVE INTERACTION WITH A TARGET IN AN ENCLOSURE" and the invention titled "INDIRECT INTERACTION WITH A TARGET IN AN ENCLOSURE" filed on April 16, 2020 Priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/010,977. This application also serves as a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No. 17/249,148 filed on February 22, 2021, entitled "CONTROLLING OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE DEVICES", which was filed in October 2018 Continuation of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/096,557 filed on April 25, 2017 with the title of "CONTROLLING OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE DEVICES" National Phase of International Patent Application No. PCT/US17/29476 for SWITCHABLE DEVICES, claiming a U.S. provisional patent application with the title of "CONTROLLING OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE DEVICES" filed on April 26, 2016 Priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/327,880, U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 14/391,122, filed October 7, 2014, now published on July 30, 2019 and titled " APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES "US Patent No. 10,365,531 is a continuation in part of the international patent application No. PCT of the invention titled "APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES" filed on April 12, 2013 /US13/36456, the international patent application claims the priority of the US provisional patent application No. 61/624,175 filed on April 13, 2012 with the title of "APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES". This application also serves as a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/946,947 filed on July 13, 2020, entitled "AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK", which was filed in 2019 Continuation of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/462,916 filed on May 21, 2018, with the title of "AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK", which was filed in the U.S. on September 6, 2018 Patent Application No. 16/082,793 and a continuation of U.S. Patent No. 10,935,864 published on March 1, 2021 entitled "METHOD OF COMMISSIONING ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS". U.S. Patent Application No. 16/462,916 filed on May 21, 2019 with the title of "AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK" is also filed on November 20, 2017 with the title of "AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF The national phase of the international patent application No. PCT/US17/62634 of CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK, which claimed the title of the invention filed on August 29, 2017 as "AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK" Priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/551,649 and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/426,126 filed on November 23, 2016 entitled "AUTOMATED COMMISSIONING OF CONTROLLERS IN A WINDOW NETWORK" priority. This application also serves as a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/950,774, filed on November 17, 2020, entitled "DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS" and filed on October 24, 2019 Continuation of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/608,157 filed on April 25, 2018 with the title of invention "DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS" National Phase of International Patent Application No. PCT/US18/29476 asserting (i) US provisional patent application filed on December 19, 2017 entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY FIELD" Priority of US Patent Application No. 62/607,618, (ii) priority of US Provisional Patent Application No. 62/523,606 filed on June 22, 2017, entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY", (iii) ) the priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/507,704 filed on May 17, 2017 entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY", (iv) the title of invention filed on May 15, 2017 Priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/506,514 for "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY" and (v) the U.S. patent application titled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY" filed on April 26, 2017 Priority of Provisional Patent Application No. 62/490,457. This application also serves as a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No. 17/083,128 filed on October 28, 2020, with the title of invention "BUILDING NETWORK", which was filed on October 25, 2019 The continuation of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/664,089 with the title of invention "BUILDING NETWORK", which is an international patent filed on May 2, 2019 with the title of invention "EDGE NETWORK FOR BUILDING SERVICES" National phase of application No. PCT/US19/30467, the international patent application claiming the title of the U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/666,033 filed on May 2, 2018 entitled "EDGE NETWORK FOR BUILDING SERVICES" Priority, U.S. Patent Application No. 17/083,128 is also part of the continuation of International Patent Application No. CT/US18/29460 filed on April 25, 2018 with the title of invention "TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM FOR BUILDING SERVICES" , the international patent application claims the priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/607,618, the priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/523,606, the priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/507,704, the U.S. Priority to Provisional Patent Application No. 62/506,514, and Priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/490,457. This application also serves as a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No. 17/081,809 filed on October 27, 2020 with the title of "TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM COMPUTING PLATFORM", which was filed in October 2019 Continuation of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/608,159 filed on the 24th with the title of "TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM COMPUTING PLATFORM", which was filed on April 25, 2018 with the title of "TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM COMPUTING PLATFORM" in the national phase of International Patent Application No. PCT/US18/29406, which claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/607,618, U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/523,606 Priority, priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/507,704, priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/506,514, and priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/490,457. This application also serves as a continuation in part of U.S. Patent Application No. 17/232,598 filed on April 16, 2021 with the title of invention "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND MEDIA DISPLAY", which was filed on September 2020 The national phase of the international patent application No. PCT/US20/53641 filed on October 30 with the title of "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND MEDIA DISPLAY". The international patent application claims that the title of the invention filed on October 5, 2019 is Priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/911,271 for "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND TRANSPARENT DISPLAY", U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. Priority of 62/952,207, priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/975,706 filed on February 12, 2020, entitled "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND MEDIA DISPLAY", filed on September 30, 2020 Priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/085,254 with the title of invention "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND MEDIA DISPLAY" AND WIRELESS CHARGING", the continuation in part of the international patent application No. PCT/US2021/052587, which claims the right of priority to the following: the title of the invention filed on April 2, 2021 is "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING", U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/170,245, filed on February 26, 2021, U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/ 154,352 and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/115,842 filed on November 19, 2020, entitled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION". This application also serves as a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No. 17/250,586 filed on February 5, 2021, entitled "CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS", which It is the national phase of the international patent application No. PCT/US19/46524 with the title of "CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS" filed on August 14, 2019. The international patent application claimed in 2018 The benefit of priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/764,821, filed on August 15, 2018, with the title of "CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS", an invention filed on October 15, 2018 THE RIGHTS OF PRIORITY TO U.S. PROVISIONAL PATENT APPLICATION 62/745,920, TITLE "CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS," AND AN INVENTION FILING FEBRUARY 14, 2019, TITLE "CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS" USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND NEURAL NETWORKS" U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/805,841. International patent application No. PCT/US19/46524 is also an international patent application No. PCT/US19/23268 with the title of "CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND SCHEDULE-BASED" filed on March 20, 2019 Part of the continuation of the international patent application claiming the priority of the U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/646,260 filed on March 21, 2018 with the title of "METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR CONTROLLING TINTABLE WINDOWS WITH CLOUD DETECTION" and Interest, priority and interest in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/666,572, filed on May 3, 2018, entitled "CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING EXTERNAL 3D MODELING AND SCHEDULE-BASED COMPUTING", International Patent Application Case No. PCT/US19/23268 is a continuation in part of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/013,770 filed on June 20, 2018 with the title of "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS", which was filed in Continuation of US Patent Application No. 15/347,677 filed on November 9, 2016 with the title of "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS", US Patent Application No. 15/347,677 was filed on May 7, 2015 The continuation in part of the international patent application No. PCT/US15/29675 with the title of "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS", which claims that the title of the invention filed on May 9, 2014 is "CONTROL METHOD FOR Priority and benefits of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/991,375 for "TINTABLE WINDOWS", and U.S. Patent Application No. 15/347,677 is also an invention filed on February 21, 2013. The name of the invention is "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS" Continuation-in-Part of U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 13/772,969. International Patent Application No. PCT/US19/46524 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/438,177 filed on June 11, 2019, entitled "APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES", the U.S. Patent The application is a continuation of the US patent application No. 14/391,122 filed on October 7, 2014 with the title of "APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES"; the US patent application No. 14/391,122 was filed in 2013 The national phase of the international patent application No. PCT/US13/36456 with the title of "APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES" filed on April 12, which claims the title of the invention filed on April 13, 2012 Priority to and benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/624,175 for "APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES," each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety for all purposes. This application is also part of the continuation of the US Patent Application No. 17/666,355 filed on February 7, 2022 with the title of "APPLICATIONS FOR CONTROLLING OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE WINDOWS", which was filed on June 2019 The continuation of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/438,177 filed on October 11, which is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application No. 14/391,122 filed on October 7, 2014, the U.S. Patent Application The case is the national phase of International Patent Application No. PCT/US13/36456 filed on April 12, 2013 asserting U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/624,175 filed on April 13, 2012 rights of the number. Each of the aforementioned patent applications is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

A device that can be controlled to change the environment (eg, of a facility or building) can be directed, eg, based on objective factors. However, such guiding controls may not take into account personal preferences. Controlling an environmental control device based on objective factors may result in an individual being uncomfortable in their environment.

Aspects disclosed herein alleviate at least some of the above-mentioned disadvantages. Aspects herein relate to user preferences in the form of user input that can be used to train behavioral models. Behavioral models may be used to learn a particular user's personal preferences and/or predictive preferences based at least in part on the user's, similar users', and/or facility's historical preferences. The behavioral model can be used to suggest one or more actions (eg, one or more overrides of the device state) such that actions can be implemented based at least in part on learned user preferences and/or permission levels associated with the user.

In another aspect, a method for controlling a facility includes: receiving an input from a user indicating that a first state of a device of the facility is to change to a second state, the input being receiving over a network; predicting a third state of the device at a future time at least in part by using a machine learning model that takes into account the input from the user; and proposing the third state and/or (II ) adjust the device to the third state at the future time.

In some embodiments, the input is received via an application executing on a user device of the user. In some embodiments, the third state is proposed to the user via the application executing on the user device. In some embodiments, proposing the third state includes (a) proposing to adjust the device to the third state at the future time, and/or (b) proposing to adjust the device to the third state at the future time in response to determining that a set of conditions has occurred The time the device is adjusted to the third state, the input is received under the set of conditions. In some embodiments, the method includes providing a user response to the suggestion to the machine learning model. In some embodiments, the machine learning model constructs a training sample based at least in part on the input received, and wherein the training sample can be used to generate future predictions by the machine learning model. In some embodiments, the facility is a first facility, wherein the user is a first user, and wherein the future predictions (i) relate to a second facility other than the first facility, and/or (ii) relates to a second user other than the first user. In some embodiments, the device is a tintable window. In some embodiments, the device is an environmental conditioning system component, a security system component, a health system component, an electrical system component, a communication system component, and/or a people conveyor system component. In some embodiments, the people conveyance system includes an elevator. In some embodiments, the environmental conditioning system includes an HVAC component or a lighting system component. In some embodiments, the communication system includes a transparent media display. In some embodiments, the transparent media display (i) includes an array of transparent organic light emitting diodes, and/or (ii) is operatively coupled to a tintable window. In some embodiments, the input indicates a user request to override the first state of the device to the second state of the device. In some embodiments, the first state is determined based at least in part on sensor readings associated with the facility, schedule information associated with the facility, and/or weather information associated with a geographic location of the facility A guiding model decision of the first state is determined. In some embodiments, the input is received under a set of conditions, and wherein adjusting the device to the third state at the future time is in response to detecting an occurrence of the set of conditions at the future time. In some embodiments, proposing the third state includes proposing the third state to a user other than the user from whom the input was received. In some embodiments, the third state is equal to the first state or the second state. In some embodiments, the machine learning model takes into account the input at least in part by causing the device to adjust to the third state at the future time. In some embodiments, the machine learning model considers the input at least in part by determining that one or more parameters associated with the input match one or more of: (i) A rule-based model, and/or (ii) an heuristic used by the machine learning model. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters include timing information, user identifier information, building type information associated with the facility, and/or sensor information. In some embodiments, the sensor information indicates sunlight penetration depth, vertical and/or horizontal shading, and/or light level. In some embodiments, the sensor information is indicative of a level of activity and/or occupancy in an enclosure of the facility. In some embodiments, the third state is associated with the matched rule-based pattern and/or heuristic. In some embodiments, the rule-based patterns and/or heuristics are generated based at least in part on data received from a plurality of users other than the user. In some embodiments, the data received from the plurality of users is associated with enclosures of the facility, facilities other than the facility, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, the plurality of facilities has been identified based at least in part on a cluster of the plurality of facilities as sharing at least one common characteristic with the facility. In some embodiments, the at least one common characteristic includes geographic information, weather pattern information, social preference information, and/or building type information. In some embodiments, the machine learning model further takes into account a location of the user within and/or relative to the facility. In some embodiments, the location of the user within the facility is determined based at least in part on geolocation technologies, wherein the geolocation technologies optionally include radio frequency (RF) transmissions and/or sensing, and wherein the radio frequency (RF) Optically contains ultra-wideband (UWB) frequencies. In some embodiments, the device is identified based at least in part on the location of the user within the facility. In some embodiments, the network is a network of the facility, wherein at least a portion of the network is optionally (i) a first network installed in the facility, (ii) disposed at the facility (iii) configured to carry power and communications over a single cable, and (iv) configured to carry multiple communication protocols in an envelope.

In another aspect, an apparatus for controlling a facility includes at least one processor configured to (I) operatively couple to a network and (II) execute Any of the methods disclosed herein or directing the execution of any of the methods. In some embodiments, the at least one processor is part of a mobile device. In some embodiments, at least a portion of the at least one processor is included in at least one controller.

In another aspect, an apparatus for controlling a facility includes at least one processor configured to: operatively couple to a network; receive instructions from a user A first state of a device of the facility will change to a second state or lead to receipt of an input received over the network; receipt indicates a predicted third time for the device at a future time state information or guide the receipt of the information, wherein the predicted third state is determined by a machine learning model that considers the input from the user; The third state of the user, and/or (II) receiving an indication that the device has adjusted to the third state or directing receipt of the indication.

A non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility which when read by one or more processors operatively coupled to a network cause the one or The plurality of processors performs operations comprising or directing the performance of any of the methods disclosed above. In some embodiments, the input is received from the user via a software application, and wherein the one or more processors are operatively coupled to the software application. In some embodiments, the software application is stored on the non-transitory computer readable program instructions.

In another aspect, non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility that, when read by one or more processors, cause the one or more The processor performs operations comprising: receiving or directing receipt of an input from a user indicating that a first state of a device of the facility is to change to a second state, the input being received over a network ; receiving or directing receipt of information indicative of a predicted third state for the device at a future time, wherein the predicted third state is determined by a machine learning model considering the input from the user; and (I) presenting a proposal to transition to the third state or directing the presentation of the proposal, and/or (II) receiving an indication that the device has adjusted to the third state or directing receipt of the indication.

In another aspect, a system for controlling a facility includes: a network configured to: (I) operatively couple to a device of the facility; and (II) transmit and One or more signals associated with any of the methods disclosed above. In some embodiments, the device of the facility may include a tintable window, a sensor, a transmitter, a transceiver, a controller, a collection of devices, or an antenna. In some embodiments, the device collectively includes (a) a sensor, (b) a transceiver, or (c) a sensor and a transmitter, and wherein the device collectively is housed in a housing. In some embodiments, the network is configured to utilize a single cable for power and communication. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit signals adhering to different protocols using a single cable. In some embodiments, the different communication protocols include cellular, media, control, or data. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit a signal to adjust the device of the facility to be in a first state.

In another aspect, a system for controlling a facility includes: a network configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility; transmit instructions from a user to the facility A first state of the device will change to a second state by an input received via the network. transmitting a prediction for a third state of the device at a future time, wherein the prediction is determined at least in part using a machine learning model that considers the input from the user; and transmitting (I) the third state A proposal of the state and/or (II) an instruction to adjust the device to the third state at the future time. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit a signal to adjust the device of the facility to be in a first state.

In another aspect, an apparatus for controlling a facility includes at least one controller configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility; Adjustment of the device to the first state of a plurality of states including a first state, a second state, and a third state or adjustment to direct the device to the first state; and adjustment of the device at a future time to The third state or the adjustment that directs the device to the third state, wherein at the future time the third state is to change to a second state by considering an indication from a user that the device's first state of the facility will change to a second state at the future time The state is predicted by a machine learning model of an input received via a network. In some embodiments, the at least one controller is part of a hierarchical control system. In some embodiments, the hierarchical control system includes at least three hierarchical levels.

In another aspect, non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility, the non-transitory computer readable program instructions when issued by one or more of the devices operatively coupled to the facility A processor, when read, causes the one or more processors to perform operations comprising: a device operatively coupled to the facility; adjusting a device of the facility to include a first state, a second state, and the first state of a plurality of states of a third state or cause adjustment of the device to the first state; and adjustment of the device to the third state or cause adjustment of the device to the third state at a future time conditioning, wherein at the future time the third state is predicted by a machine learning model that considers an input from a user indicating that the first state of the device of the facility will change to a second state, the input being received via a network.

In some embodiments, at least one of the one or more processors is associated with a server. In some embodiments, the server is located in the facility. In some embodiments, the server is associated with a cloud service. In some embodiments, at least one processor is included in a microcontroller. In some embodiments, the microcontroller is housed in a housing as part of a device collective that includes (a) a sensor, (b) a transceiver, or (c) a sensor and a transmitter. In some embodiments, the device is collectively located in a fixture of the facility, wherein the fixture includes a floor, a ceiling, a wall, or a frame assembly.

In another aspect, a method for controlling a facility includes: obtaining an input from a user indicating a preference associated with a present state of a device of the facility under a set of conditions, the method Input is obtained over a network; a database is updated to include the input by the user; an action to be associated with the set of conditions is identified based at least in part on the database; and an action associated with the action is transmitted over the network one or more signals.

In some embodiments, the input includes feedback from the user regarding the current state of the device. In some embodiments, the action includes adjusting the device to a different state than the present state at a future time. In some embodiments, the action includes proposing to adjust the device to a different state than the present state at a future time. In some embodiments, the proposed adjustment is provided to a user other than the user from whom the input was obtained. In some embodiments, the action to be associated with the set of conditions is identified at least in part by identifying (i) a rule-based pattern and/or (ii) a heuristic associated with the set of conditions. In some embodiments, the set of conditions includes timing information, user identifier information, building type information associated with the facility, and/or sensor information. In some embodiments, the sensor information indicates sunlight penetration depth, vertical and/or horizontal shading, and/or light level. In some embodiments, the action is identified based at least in part on input obtained from a plurality of users other than the user. In some embodiments, the action is identified based at least in part on input obtained in relation to enclosures of the facility, facilities other than the facility, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, the device is a tintable window, and wherein the current state includes a current tint level of the tintable window. In some embodiments, the one or more signals transmitted over the network cause the tintable window to transition to a different tint level associated with the identified action. In some embodiments, the device is: (i) an environmental conditioning system component, (ii) a security system component, (iii) a health system component, (iv) an electrical system component, (v) a communication system component , and/or (vi) a people conveyor system component. In some embodiments, the people conveyance system includes an elevator. In some embodiments, the environmental conditioning system includes (I) a heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) system component, or (II) a lighting system component. In some embodiments, the communication system includes a transparent media display. In some embodiments, the transparent media display (i) includes a transparent organic light emitting diode (TOLED) array, and/or (ii) is operatively coupled to a tintable window. In some embodiments, the method further comprises: (I) obtaining a user response to the identified action; and (II) updating the database to include the user response to the identified action.

In another aspect, an apparatus for controlling a facility includes at least one processor configured to (I) operatively couple to a network and (II) execute Any of the methods disclosed herein or directing the execution of any of the methods. In some embodiments, the at least one processor is part of a mobile device. In some embodiments, at least a portion of the at least one processor is included in at least one controller.

In another aspect, an apparatus for controlling a facility includes at least one processor configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility; obtain from a user an input indicating or directing obtaining of a preference associated with a present state of the device of the facility under a set of conditions, the input being obtained via a network; transmitting an indication of the input by the user, The transmitting causes a database to be updated to include the input by the user; and receiving one or more signals associated with an action, wherein the action is associated with the set of conditions, and wherein the action has been based at least in part on the database identify.

A non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility which when read by one or more processors operatively coupled to a network cause the one or The plurality of processors performs operations comprising or directing the performance of any of the methods disclosed above. In some embodiments, the input from the user is obtained via a software application, and wherein the one or more processors are operatively coupled to the software application. In some embodiments, the software application is stored on the non-transitory computer readable program instructions.

In another aspect, non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility that, when read by one or more processors, cause the one or more The processor performs operations comprising: being operatively coupled to a device of the facility; obtaining an input indicative of a preference associated with a present state of the device of the facility under a set of conditions or directing obtaining of the input , the input is obtained over a network; transmitting an instruction of the user's input or leading to the transmission of the instruction, the transmission causing a database to be updated to include the user's input; and receiving an action associated with One or more signals or leads to receipt of the one or more signals, wherein the action is associated with the set of conditions, and wherein the action has been identified based at least in part on the database.

In another aspect, a system for controlling a facility includes: a network configured to be operatively coupled to a device of the facility; and the methods disclosed above transmission of one or more signals associated with any of the In some embodiments, the device of the facility may include a tintable window, a sensor, a transmitter, a transceiver, a controller, a collection of devices, or an antenna. In some embodiments, the device collectively includes (a) a sensor, (b) a transceiver, or (c) a sensor and a transmitter, the device collectively enclosed in a housing. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit power and communication using a single cable. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit signals adhering to different protocols using a single cable. In some embodiments, the different communication protocols include cellular, media, control, or data. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit a signal to adjust the device of the facility to be in a first state.

In another aspect, a system for controlling a facility includes: a network configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility; transmit an input obtained from a user , the input indicating a preference associated with a present state of a device of the facility under a set of conditions, the input being obtained over the network; transmitting an indication of the input to a database, the transmission causing the database updating to include the input by the user; transmitting an identification of an action, wherein the action is associated with the set of conditions, and wherein the action is based at least in part on the database identification; and transmitting one or more Signal. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit a signal to adjust the device of the facility to be in a first state.

In another aspect, an apparatus for controlling a facility includes at least one controller configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility; adjusting the device to a present state or directing the adjustment of the device to the present state; and receiving or directing the receipt of one or more signals associated with an action, wherein the action is associated with a set of conditions and at least in part is identified based on a database, and wherein the action is identified in response to a user input indicating a preference associated with the present state of the device of the facility under the set of conditions, the input being obtained via a network . In some embodiments, the at least one controller is part of a hierarchical control system. In some embodiments, the hierarchical control system includes at least three hierarchical levels.

In another aspect, non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility that, when read by one or more processors, cause the one or more The processor performs operations comprising: being operatively coupled to a device of the facility; causing the device of the facility to be adjusted to a present state; and receiving one or more signals associated with an action or directing the one or more receipt of a signal, wherein the action is associated with a set of conditions and identified based at least in part on a database, and wherein the action is responsive to a preference indicating that the present state of the device of the facility is associated with the set of conditions Recognized by a user input from a network, the input is obtained through a network. In some embodiments, at least one of the one or more processors is associated with a server. In some embodiments, the server is located in the facility. In some embodiments, the server is associated with a cloud service. In some embodiments, at least one processor is a microcontroller. In some embodiments, the microcontroller is part of a device collective comprising (a) a sensor, (b) a transceiver, or (c) a sensor and a transmitter, the device Collectively enclosed in a shell. In some embodiments, the device is collectively located in a fixture of the facility, wherein the fixture includes a floor, a ceiling, a wall, or a frame assembly.

In another aspect, a method for controlling a facility includes receiving an input from a user indicating a preference associated with a state of a device of the facility, the input via a network reception; determining whether to change the state of the device based at least in part on (i) the input and (ii) a user rights scheme, the determination of whether changing the state of the device results in a positive determination or results in a negative determining; and using the positive determination to change the state of the device.

In some embodiments, the input is a feedback of a suggested state of the device. In some embodiments, the positive determination occurs in response to determining that the input indicates a change in the state of the device of the facility and that the user has permission to change the state of the device. In some embodiments, the negative determination occurs in response to a determination that the input does not indicate a change in the state of the device of the facility and/or the user does not have permission to change the current state of the device. In some embodiments, the device is a tintable window, and wherein the state of the device comprises a tint state of the tintable window. In some embodiments, in response to the determination of whether to change the state of the device results in the negative determination, the state of the device does not change. In some embodiments, the device is an environmental conditioning system component, a security system component, a health system component, an electrical system component, a communication system component, and/or a people conveyor system component. In some embodiments, the people conveyance system includes an elevator. In some embodiments, the environmental conditioning system includes an HVAC component or a lighting system component. In some embodiments, the communication system includes a transparent media display. In some embodiments, the transparent media display (i) includes an array of transparent organic light emitting diodes, and/or (ii) is operatively coupled to a tintable window. In some embodiments, the user rights scheme changes over time. In some embodiments, the user rights scheme is based at least in part on energy considerations associated with the facility, health considerations associated with occupants of the facility, safety considerations associated with the facility, and/or Jurisdictional considerations vary over time. In some embodiments, the user permissions scheme indicates permissions for the user that vary based at least in part on a geographic location of the user relative to the facility. In some embodiments, the user permissions scheme is based at least in part on a role of the user within an organization. In some embodiments, the user permissions scheme is based at least in part on input from a plurality of users other than the user. In some embodiments, the user permission scheme indicates not allowing the user to change the state of the device in response to determining that a majority of the plurality of users disagree with the input indicating the preference.

In another aspect, an apparatus for controlling a facility includes at least one processor configured to (I) operatively couple to a network and (II) execute Any of the methods disclosed herein or directing the execution of any of the methods. In some embodiments, the at least one processor is part of a mobile device. In some embodiments, at least a portion of the at least one processor is included in at least one controller.

In another aspect, an apparatus for controlling a facility includes at least one processor configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility and to a network; receive receiving an input from a user or directing the input indicating a preference associated with a state of the device of the facility, the input being received over the network; based at least in part on (i) the input and (ii) a user rights scheme determines whether to change the state of the device or directs a determination of whether to change the state of the device, the determination of whether changing the state of the device results in a positive determination or results in a negative determination; and at least Changing or directing a change in the state of the device based in part on the positive determination.

A non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility which when read by one or more processors operatively coupled to a network cause the one or The plurality of processors performs operations comprising or directing the performance of any of the methods disclosed above. In some embodiments, the input is received from the user via a software application, and wherein at least one of the one or more processors executes the software application. In some embodiments, the software application is stored in the non-transitory computer readable program instructions.

In another aspect, non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility that, when read by one or more processors, cause the one or more The processor performs operations comprising: being operatively coupled to a device of the facility and to a network; receiving or directing receipt of an input from a user, the input indicating a relationship with a device of the facility a preference associated with the state, the input is received via the network; determining whether to change the state of the device or directing whether to change the state of the device based at least in part on (i) the input and (ii) a user rights scheme a determination of whether changing the state of the device results in a positive determination or results in a negative determination; and changing the state of the device or directing a change in the state of the device based at least in part on the positive determination.

In another aspect, a system for controlling a facility includes: a network configured to be operatively coupled to a device of the facility; and the methods disclosed above transmission of one or more signals associated with any of the In some embodiments, the device of the facility may include a tintable window, a sensor, a transmitter, a transceiver, a controller, a collection of devices, or an antenna. In some embodiments, the device collectively includes (a) a sensor, (b) a transceiver, or (c) a sensor and a transmitter, the device collectively enclosed in a housing. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit power and communication using a single cable. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit signals adhering to different protocols using a single cable. In some embodiments, the different communication protocols include cellular, media, control, or data. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit a signal to adjust the device of the facility to be in a first state.

In another aspect, a system for controlling a facility includes: a network configured to: transmit an input from a user indicating communication with a device of the facility a preference associated with the state, the input is received over the network; a determination of whether to transmit the change to the state of the device, wherein the determination is based at least in part on (i) the input and (ii) a user rights scheme, whether The decision to change the state of the device results in a positive decision or results in a negative decision; using the positive decision to transmit an instruction to change the state of the device. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit a signal to adjust the state of the device to be in a first state.

In another aspect, an apparatus for controlling a facility includes at least one controller configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility and to a network; adjustment of the device to or directing the device to a state of the device; determining whether to change the state of the device based at least in part on (i) an input from a user and (ii) a user permissions scheme or leading to a determination of whether to change the state of the device, the determination of whether to change the state of the device results in a positive determination or results in a negative determination, the input is received over the network; and based at least in part on the positive determination Changing the state of the device or inducing a change in the state of the device. In some embodiments, the at least one controller is configured to receive the input from the user from a user input database in memory, and wherein the at least one controller is operatively coupled to the memory . In some embodiments, the input is received from the user via a software application, and wherein the at least one controller is operatively coupled to the software application. In some embodiments, the software application is stored on a non-transitory computer-readable medium, and wherein the at least one controller is operatively coupled to the non-transitory computer-readable medium.

In another aspect, non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility that, when read by one or more processors, cause the one or more The processor performs operations comprising: a device operatively coupled to the facility and to a network; adjusting the device to a state of the device or directing the device to the state; based at least in part on (i ) an input from a user and (ii) a user rights scheme determines whether to change the state of the device or guides a determination whether to change the state of the device, the determination of whether to change the state of the device results in a positive determining or causing a negative determination; and changing or inducing a change in the state of the device based at least in part on the positive determination, the input being received over the network. In some embodiments, at least one of the one or more processors is associated with a server. In some embodiments, the server is located in the facility. In some embodiments, the server is associated with a cloud service. In some embodiments, at least one processor is a microcontroller. In some embodiments, the microcontroller is part of a device collective comprising (a) a sensor, (b) a transceiver, or (c) a sensor and a transmitter, the device Collectively enclosed in a shell. In some embodiments, the device is collectively located in a fixture of the facility, wherein the fixture includes a floor, a ceiling, a wall, or a frame assembly.

In some embodiments, the network is an area network. In some embodiments, the network includes cables configured to transmit power and communications in a single cable. Communications may be one or more types of communications. Communications may include cellular communications complying with at least second generation (2G), third generation (3G), fourth generation (4G) or fifth generation (5G) cellular communication protocols. In some embodiments, the communication includes media communication that facilitates still images, music, or animation streams (eg, movies or videos). In some embodiments, the communication includes data communication (eg, sensor data). In some embodiments, the communication includes control communication, eg, to control operative coupling to one or more nodes of the networks. In some embodiments, the network includes a first (eg, cabling) network installed in the facility. In some embodiments, the network includes a (eg, cabling) network installed within an enclosure of a facility (eg, within the envelope of a building included in the facility).

In another aspect, the invention provides a system, an apparatus (e.g., a controller), and/or one or more non-transitory computer-readable media (e.g., software) that implement any of the methods disclosed herein .

In another aspect, the disclosure provides a method of using any of the systems, computer-readable media, and/or apparatus disclosed herein, eg, for its intended purpose.

In another aspect, an apparatus includes at least one controller programmed to direct a mechanism for performing (e.g., performing) any of the methods disclosed herein, the at least one controller configured state to be operatively coupled to the mechanism. In some embodiments, at least two operations (eg, of a method) are directed/performed by the same controller. In some embodiments, at least two operations are directed/performed by different controllers.

In another aspect, an apparatus includes at least one controller configured (eg, programmed) to perform (eg, implement) any one of the methods disclosed herein. At least one controller can implement any of the methods disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (eg, of a method) are directed/performed by the same controller. In some embodiments, at least two operations are directed/performed by different controllers.

In some embodiments, one of the at least one controller is configured to perform two or more operations. In some embodiments, two different controllers of the at least one controller are configured to each perform a different operation.

In another aspect, a system includes at least one controller programmed to direct at least one other device (or component thereof) and the operation of the device (or component thereof), wherein the at least one A controller is operatively coupled to the device (or components thereof). The device (or component thereof) may comprise any device (or component thereof) disclosed herein. At least one controller can be configured to direct any of the devices (or components thereof) disclosed herein. At least one controller can be configured to be operatively coupled to any of the devices (or components thereof) disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (eg, of a device) are directed by the same controller. In some embodiments, at least two operations are directed by different controllers.

In another aspect, a computer software product (e.g., written on one or more non-transitory media) stores program instructions that, when read by at least one processor (e.g., a computer), cause At least one processor directs the mechanism disclosed herein to implement (eg, perform) any of the methods disclosed herein, wherein the at least one processor is configured to be operatively coupled to the mechanism. A mechanism may comprise any of the devices disclosed herein (or any component thereof). In some embodiments, at least two operations (eg, of a device) are directed/performed by the same processor. In some embodiments, at least two operations are directed/performed by different processors.

In another aspect, the invention provides non-transitory computer-readable program instructions (e.g., included in a program product comprising one or more non-transitory media) comprising machine-executable code, the machine The executable code, when executed by one or more processors, implements any of the methods disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (eg, of a method) are directed/performed by the same processor. In some embodiments, at least two operations are directed/performed by different processors.

In another aspect, the invention provides one or more non-transitory computer-readable media containing machine-executable code that, when executed by one or more processors, implements (eg, as disclosed herein) bootstrapping of the controller. In some embodiments, at least two operations (eg, of a controller) are directed/performed by the same processor. In some embodiments, at least two operations are directed/performed by different processors.

In another aspect, the present invention provides a computer system comprising one or more computer processors and one or more non-transitory computer readable media coupled thereto. The non-transitory computer-readable medium includes machine-executable code that, when executed by one or more processors, implements any of the methods disclosed herein and/or implements any of the methods disclosed herein ( multiple) controller guidance.

In another aspect, the invention provides non-transitory computer readable program instructions that, when read by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to execute Any operation of a method disclosed herein, any operation performed (or configured to be performed) by an apparatus disclosed herein, and/or any operation directed (or configured to be directed) by an apparatus disclosed herein operate.

In some embodiments, the program instructions are written on one or more non-transitory computer-readable media. In some embodiments, at least two of these operations are performed by one of the one or more processors. In some embodiments, at least two of the operations are each performed by different processors of the one or more processors.

In another aspect, the invention provides a network configured for transmission of any communication (eg, signal) and/or (eg, electricity) power that facilitates any of the operations disclosed herein. Communications may include control communications, cellular communications, media communications and/or data communications. Data communication may include sensor data communication and/or processed data communication. Networks can be configured to comply with one or more protocols that facilitate this communication. For example, the communication protocol used by the network (eg, with a BMS) may be Building Automation and Control Network Protocol (BACnet). For example, the protocol can facilitate cellular communication complying with at least a 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or 5th generation cellular protocol.

The content of this Summary section is provided as a simplified introduction to the present invention and is not intended to limit the scope of any invention disclosed herein or the scope of the appended claims.

Additional aspects and advantages of the present invention will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the following description, in which only illustrative embodiments of the invention are shown and described. As will be realized, the invention is capable of other and different embodiments, and its several details are capable of modifications in various obvious respects, all without departing from the invention. Accordingly, the drawings and descriptions are to be regarded as illustrative in nature and not restrictive.

These and other features and embodiments will be described in more detail with reference to the drawings. incorporated herein by reference

All publications, patents and patent applications mentioned in this specification are herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference The method is incorporated into the general.

While various embodiments of the invention have been shown and described herein, it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that such embodiments are provided by way of example only. Numerous variations, changes and substitutions will occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the invention. It should be understood that various alternatives to the embodiments of the invention described herein may be employed.

Terms such as "a (a/an)" and "the" are not intended to refer to only a single entity, but include general categories that specific instances may be used for illustration. The terminology herein is used to describe particular embodiments of the invention(s), but its use does not delimit the invention(s).

Unless otherwise specified, when a range is referred to, the range is intended to be inclusive. For example, a range between a value of 1 and a value of 2 is intended to be inclusive and includes the value of 1 and the value of 2. An inclusive range would span any value from about 1 to about 2. As used herein, the term "adjacent" or "adjacent to" includes "next to", "adjoining", "in contact with" and "close to ( in proximity to)".

As used herein, including in claims, the conjunction "and/or" in phrases such as "comprising X, Y and/or Z" means any combination of X, Y and Z or plural. For example, this phrase means to include X. For example, this phrase means to include Y. For example, this phrase means including Z. For example, this phrase means including X and Y. For example, this phrase means including X and Z. For example, this phrase means including Y and Z. For example, this phrase means including plural X's. For example, this phrase means including a plurality of Y's. For example, this phrase means including a plurality of Z's. For example, this phrase means including a plurality of X's and a plurality of Y's. For example, the phrase is meant to include a plurality of X's and a plurality of Z's. For example, this phrase means including a plurality of Y's and a plurality of Z's. For example, this phrase is meant to include a plurality of X's and Y's. For example, this phrase is meant to include a plurality of X's and Z's. For example, this phrase is meant to include a plurality of Y's and Z's. For example, this phrase means including X and a plurality of Y's. For example, this phrase means including X and a plurality of Z's. For example, this phrase means including Y and a plurality of Z's. The conjunction "and/or (and/or)" means to have the same effect as the phrase "X, Y, Z, or any combination or plural thereof". The conjunction "and/or (and/or)" means to have the same effect as the phrase "one or more X, Y, Z, or any combination thereof".

The term "operatively coupled" or "operatively connected" refers to a first element that is coupled (eg, connected) to a second element to allow intended operation of the second element and/or the first element. Components (e.g. Mechanisms). Coupling may include physical or non-physical coupling. Non-physical couplings may include signal-induced couplings (eg, wireless couplings). Coupling may include physical coupling (eg, physical connection) or non-physical coupling (eg, via wireless communication). Also, in the following description, the phrases "operable to", "adapted to", "configured to", "designed to", "programmed to" or "capable of" are used interchangeably as appropriate use.

An element "configured to" perform a function (eg, a mechanism) includes structural features that cause the element to perform that function. Structural features may include electrical features, such as circuitry or circuit elements. Structural features may include actuators. Structural features may include circuitry (eg, include electrical or optical circuitry). Electrical circuitry may include one or more wires. The optical circuitry may include at least one optical element (eg, beam splitter, mirror, lens, and/or optical fiber). Structural features may include mechanical features. Mechanical features may include latches, springs, closures, hinges, chassis, supports, mounts, or outriggers, among others. Performing functions may include utilizing logic features. Logical features may include programmed instructions. Programmed instructions are executable by at least one processor. Programmed instructions can be stored or encoded on a medium that can be accessed by one or more processors. Additionally, in the following description, the phrases "operable to", "adapted to", "configured to", "designed to", "programmed to" or "capable of" may be used interchangeably as appropriate use.

The following embodiments are directed to specific example implementations for the purposes of disclosing the subject matter. Although the disclosed implementations are described in sufficient detail to enable one of ordinary skill in the art to practice the disclosed subject matter, the disclosure is not limited to the specific features of the particular example implementations described herein. Rather, the concepts and teachings disclosed herein may be implemented and applied in many different forms and ways without departing from the spirit and scope of the concepts and teachings disclosed herein. For example, while the disclosed implementations focus on electrochromic windows (also known as smart windows), some of the systems, devices, and methods disclosed herein can be made, applied, or used without undue experimentation Rather than passive coatings such as thermochromic coatings or photochromic coatings that passively tint in response to the sun's rays, other types of optically switchable devices that are actively switched/controlled may be incorporated or incorporated simultaneously. Some other types of actively controlled optically switchable devices include liquid crystal devices, suspended particle devices, and microblinds, among others. For example, some or all of such other optically switchable devices may be powered, driven, or otherwise controlled or integrated by one or more of the disclosed implementations of the controllers described herein.

In some embodiments, an enclosure includes a region bounded by at least one structure (eg, a fixture). At least one structure may comprise at least one wall. An enclosure may contain and/or enclose one or more sub-enclosures. At least one wall may contain metal (eg, steel), clay, stone, plastic, glass, stucco (eg, gypsum), polymers (eg, polyurethane, styrene, or vinyl), asbestos, fibers Glass, concrete (for example, reinforced concrete), wood, paper or ceramics. At least one wall may comprise wire, brick, block (eg, cinder block), tile, drywall, or framework (eg, steel and/or wood frame).

In some embodiments, the enclosure includes one or more openings. One or more openings may be reversibly closable. One or more openings may be permanently open. The substantial length dimension of the one or more openings may be small relative to the substantial length dimension of the wall(s) defining the enclosure. A basic length dimension may include the diameter, length, width or height of a bounding circle. The surface of the opening or openings may be small relative to the surface of the wall(s) defining the enclosure. The open surface can be a percentage of the total surface of the wall(s). For example, the open surface can measure up to about 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, or 1% of the wall. Walls can contain floors, ceilings, or side walls. The closable opening is closable by at least one window or door. An enclosure may be at least a portion of a facility. Facilities can contain buildings. An enclosure may comprise at least a portion of a building. A building can be a private building and/or a commercial building. A building can contain one or more floors. A building (eg, its floors) may include at least one of the following: room, hall, foyer, attic, basement, balcony (eg, internal or external), stairwell, corridor, elevator shaft, facade, mezzanine , attic, garage, porch (eg, enclosed porch), patio (eg, enclosed patio), cafeteria, and/or plumbing. In some embodiments, enclosures may be stationary and/or movable (eg, trains, airplanes, cruise ships, vehicles, or rockets).

In some embodiments, the enclosure encloses the atmosphere. The atmosphere may contain one or more gases. Gases may include inert gases (eg, including argon or nitrogen) and/or non-inert gases (eg, including oxygen or carbon dioxide). The enclosure atmosphere may be similar to the atmosphere outside the enclosure (e.g., the ambient atmosphere) in at least one external atmospheric characteristic, including: temperature, relative gas content, gas type (e.g., humidity, and/or oxygen content) ), debris (eg, dust and/or pollen), and/or gas velocity. The enclosure atmosphere may differ from the atmosphere outside the enclosure in at least one external atmospheric characteristic, including: temperature, relative gas content, gas type (e.g., moisture and/or oxygen content), debris ( For example, dust and/or pollen) and/or gas velocity. For example, the enclosure atmosphere may be less humid (eg, drier) than the external (eg, ambient) atmosphere. For example, the atmosphere of the enclosure and the atmosphere outside the enclosure may contain the same (eg, or substantially similar) ratios of oxygen to nitrogen. The velocity and/or content of gas in the enclosure may be (eg, substantially) similar throughout the enclosure. The velocity and/or content of the gas in the enclosure may vary in different portions of the enclosure (eg, by flowing the gas through a vent coupled to the enclosure). Gas content may comprise relative gas ratios.

In some embodiments, the network infrastructure is provided in an enclosure (eg, a facility such as a building). Network infrastructure can be used for various purposes, such as for providing communication and/or power services. Communication services may include high bandwidth (eg, wireless and/or wireline) communication services. Communication services may be directed to occupants of the facility and/or users external to the facility (eg, building). The network infrastructure may work in conjunction with or replace part of the infrastructure of one or more cellular operators. A network may contain one or more levels of encryption. The network is communicatively coupled to the cloud and/or one or more servers external to the facility. The network can support at least fourth generation wireless (4G) or fifth generation wireless (5G) communication. The network may support cellular signaling external and/or internal to the facility. The downlink communication network speed can have a peak data rate of at least about 5 gigabits per second (Gb/s), 10 Gb/s, or 20 Gb/s. The uplink communication network speed can have a peak data rate of at least about 2 Gb/s, 5 Gb/s, or 10 Gb/s. Network infrastructure may be provided in facilities including electrically switchable windows. Examples of components of network infrastructure include high-speed backhaul. The network infrastructure may include at least one cable, switch, (eg, physical) antenna, transceiver, sensor, transmitter, receiver, radio, processor, and/or controller (which may include a processor). The network infrastructure is operatively coupled to and/or includes a wireless network. Network infrastructure can include cabling (for example, including fiber optic, twisted pair, or coaxial cables). One or more devices (eg, sensors and/or emitters) may be deployed (eg, installed) in the environment, eg, as part of and/or after installing the network infrastructure. The device is communicatively coupled to the network. The network may include electrical and/or communication networks. For example, once a device couples (eg, when it attempts to couple) to the network, the device can be automatically discovered on the network. The network structure may include peer-to-peer network structure or master-slave network structure. A network may or may not have a central coordinating entity (eg, server(s) or another stable host). The network can be an area network. A network may include cables configured to carry power and communications in a single cable. Communications may be one or more types of communications. Communications may include cellular communications complying with at least second generation (2G), third generation (3G), fourth generation (4G) or fifth generation (5G) cellular communication protocols. Communications may include media communications that facilitate still images, music, or animation streaming (eg, movies or video). Communications may include communication of data (eg, sensor data). Communication may include control communication, eg, to control one or more nodes operatively coupled to a network. The network may include a first (eg, cabling) network installed in the facility. The network may include a network installed (eg, cabling) within the enclosure of the facility (eg, within the enclosure of an enclosure such as the facility. For example, within the envelope of a building included in the facility).

In some embodiments, the network uses one or more protocols to transmit communications between devices operatively coupled to the network. The device may include a user device (e.g., a mobile phone, tablet computer, wearable computer, desktop computer, laptop computer, game console, vehicle information and/or entertainment system, or the like), a controllable device (e.g., one or more tintable windows, media displays, components of an HVAC system, components of a lighting system, or the like), transmit and/or receive data from other controllers (e.g., a master controller, terminal (e.g., local ) controller, etc.), an intermediate controller for communications, or the like. In some embodiments, the communication protocol may include an automatic control protocol. In some embodiments, a control protocol may be used to transmit instructions (eg, instructions to perform specific actions) to devices that may be controlled. Examples of control protocols include: a vehicle bus standard that allows controllers and/or devices to communicate with each other without the use of an intermediate host computer, such as the Controller Area Network (CAN) protocol or a CAN-based protocol (e.g., 11939, ISO11783, etc.); vehicle network communication protocol, such as FlexRay; vehicle-based or car-based high-speed serial communication and/or isochronous real-time data transfer protocol, such as IDB-1394; communication bus protocol, which is used in vehicles devices within devices such as IEBus; serial communication control protocols (e.g., 11708 or other serial communication control protocols); communication protocols for on-board diagnostic systems of vehicle components, such as Keyword Protocol 2000 (KWP2000); serial networks Protocol, which is used for communication between components of a vehicle, such as Logical Interconnect Network (LIN); high-speed multimedia network technology, which is used for communication of audio, voice, video, and/or other data, such as media Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST); real-time distributed computing and/or communication protocols for intra-vehicle communication, such as UAVCAN; vehicle bus protocols using serial protocols, such as Vehicle Area Network (VAN) Network, VAN) or similar. In some embodiments, the communication protocol may include a cellular communication protocol. The cellular communication protocol may include fourth generation (4G) communication protocol and/or fifth generation (5G) communication protocol. In some embodiments, the communication protocol may include a media protocol. Media protocols may include one or more protocols for streaming, rendering, and/or controlling the presentation of media content on media devices and/or displays. Examples of media protocols include: network control protocols to control streaming media servers and/or establish and/or control media communication sessions, such as real-time streaming protocol (RTSP); In delivering media content (e.g., video and/or audio) over Internet Protocol (IP) networks, such as real-time transport protocol (RTCP); protocols associated with IP suites, such as Transmission Control Protocol ( TCP); a unicast protocol for one-to-one communication between devices; a multicast protocol for one-to-many communication between devices, or the like. In some embodiments, the network can be configured to use a combination of different protocols. For example, a network can be configured to receive data from a first device using a first protocol and transmit data to a second device using a second protocol. In one example, the network may receive data from the first device using a wireless protocol (e.g., 4G cellular, 5G cellular, or the like) and an automatic control protocol (e.g., CAN or CAN-based protocol, VAN, etc.) to transmit the data to the second device. In some embodiments, a network can be configured to translate instructions and/or other data from one protocol into a different protocol. In some embodiments, the network can be configured to identify the protocol to use based at least in part on the identity of the device (or type of device) that is sending and/or receiving the communication.

In another embodiment, the present disclosure provides a network configured for transmission of any communication (eg, signal) and/or (eg, electricity) power that facilitates any of the operations disclosed herein. Communications may include control communications, cellular communications, media communications and/or data communications. Data communication may include sensor data communication and/or processed data communication. Networks can be configured to comply with one or more protocols that facilitate this communication. Communication protocols used by a network (eg, with a BMS) may include Building Automation and Control Network Protocol (BACnet), for example. Networks can be configured for (e.g., include hardware that facilitates) communication protocols including: BACnet (e.g., BACnet/SC), LonWorks, Modbus, KNX, European Appliance System (EHS), BatiBUS, European Installed Bus (EIB or Instabus), Zigbee, Z-wave, Insteon, X10, Bluetooth or WiFi. Networks can be configured to transmit control-related protocols. The protocol may facilitate compliance with cellular communications of at least a 2nd, 3rd, 4th or 5th generation cellular protocol. (eg, cabling) networks can include tree, linear, or star topologies. The network may include interworking and/or distributed application models for various tasks in building automation. A control system may provide a solution for configuring and/or managing resources on a network. A network may allow portions of a distributed application to be combined in different nodes operatively coupled to the network. The network can provide a communication system with message protocols and a model for communication stacking in each node (capable of hosting distributed applications (e.g., with a common core). Control systems can include programmable logic controllers ( PLC). In some embodiments, the network may utilize a vehicle bus standard (e.g., , by utilizing the CANBus protocol, the CANOpen protocol, or the like). In some embodiments, messages may be transmitted sequentially. In some embodiments, messages may be preferentially transmitted on the bus. In some embodiments, priority can be based at least in part on the prioritization of the devices. In one example, where two or more devices transmit messages simultaneously and/or in parallel, the messages can be based at least in part on the prioritization of the two or more devices Transmission via busbar.

In various embodiments, the network infrastructure supports a control system for one or more windows, such as tintable (eg, electrochromic) windows. A control system may include one or more controllers operatively coupled (eg, directly or indirectly) to one or more windows. While the disclosed embodiments describe tintable windows (also referred to herein as "optically switchable windows" or "smart windows"), such as electrochromic windows, the concepts disclosed herein can be applied to other types of switchable windows. Optical devices, including liquid crystal devices, electrochromic devices, suspended particle devices (suspended particle device; SPD), NanoChromics display (NanoChromics display; NCD), organic electroluminescent display (Organic electroluminescent display; OELD), suspended particle devices (SPD ), NanoChromics Display (NCD) or Organic Electroluminescent Display (OELD). The display element may be attached to a portion of the transparent body, such as a window.

Tinable windows can be installed in (non-temporary) installations such as buildings, and/or in temporary installations (e.g., vehicles) such as automobiles, RVs, buses, trains, airplanes, helicopters, ships, or boats middle.

In some embodiments, a tintable window exhibits a (eg, controllable and/or reversible) change in at least one optical property of the window, eg, upon application of a stimulus. The change can be a continuous change. The changes may be for discrete shading levels (eg, for at least about 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 shading levels). Optical properties may include hue or transmittance. Hue can contain colors. Transmittance can have one or more wavelengths. Wavelengths may include ultraviolet, visible or infrared wavelengths. Stimulation may include optical, electrical and/or magnetic stimulation. Stimulation may include, for example, applying voltage and/or current. One or more tintable windows may be used to control lighting and/or glare conditions, for example, by regulating the transmission of solar energy propagating therethrough. One or more tintable windows can be used to control the temperature within a building, for example, by regulating the transmission of solar energy propagating through the windows. Control of solar energy can control the heat load imposed on the interior of a facility (eg, a building). Control can be manual and/or automatic. Controls may be used to maintain one or more requested (eg, environmental) conditions, such as occupant comfort. Control may include reducing energy consumption of heating, ventilation, air conditioning and/or lighting systems. At least two of heating, ventilation and air conditioning may be induced by separate systems. At least two of heating, ventilation and air conditioning can be induced by one system. Heating, ventilation, and air conditioning can be induced by a single system (abbreviated herein as "HVAC"). In some cases, a tintable window may be responsive to (eg, and communicatively coupled to) one or more environmental sensors and/or user controls. A tintable window may include, and for example may be, an electrochromic window. A window may be located in a range from the interior to the exterior of a structure (eg, a facility, such as a building). However, it doesn't have to be. Tintable windows can be operated using liquid crystal devices, suspended particle devices, microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) devices such as microshutters, or any technology now known or later developed configured to control the transmission of light through the window. Windows (e.g., with MEMS devices for tinting) are described in the July 23, 2019 issue of the May 15, 2015 application, entitled "Multi-window Format Windows Including Electrochromic Devices and Electromechanical Systems Devices (MULTI- PANE WINDOWS INCLUDING ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES AND ELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEVICES), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In some cases, one or more tintable windows may be located inside a building, such as between a conference room and a hallway. In some cases, one or more tintable windows may be used in automobiles, trains, airplanes, and other vehicles, eg, in place of passive and/or non-tinting windows.

In some embodiments, the building management system (BMS) is a computer-based control system. A BMS may be installed in a facility to monitor and otherwise control (eg, regulate, manipulate, limit, guide, monitor, adjust, modulate, vary, modify, constrain, check, guide, or manage) the facility. For example, a BMS may control one or more devices communicatively coupled to a network. One or more devices may include mechanical and/or electrical equipment, such as ventilation, lighting, electrical systems, elevators, fire protection systems, and/or security systems. Controllers (eg, nodes and/or processors) may be adapted for integration with the BMS. A BMS may include hardware. Hardware may include interconnections via communication channels to one or more processors (eg, and associated software), eg, for maintaining one or more conditions in a facility. One or more conditions in a facility may be based on preferences set by users (eg, occupants, facility owners, and/or facility managers). For example, a BMS can be implemented using a local area network such as Ethernet. Software can utilize, for example, Internet Protocol and/or open standards. One example is software from Tridium Corporation (Richmond, Va.). One communication protocol available for BMSs is BACnet (Building Automation and Control Network). A node can be any addressable circuit. For example, a node may be a circuit with an Internet Protocol (IP) address.

In some embodiments, a BMS may be implemented in a facility, such as a multi-story building. A BMS can (eg, also) be used to control one or more characteristics of a facility's environment. The one or more characteristics may include: temperature, carbon dioxide content, gas flow, various volatile organic compounds (VOCs), and/or humidity in the building. There may be mechanical devices controlled by the BMS, such as one or more heaters, air conditioners, blowers and/or vents. To control the facility environment, the BMS can turn on and/or turn off these various devices under defined conditions. A core function of a BMS may be, for example, to maintain a comfortable environment for occupants of the environment while minimizing heating and cooling costs and/or requirements. A BMS can be used to control one or more of a variety of systems. BMS can be used to optimize synergy between various systems. For example, BMS can be used to save energy and reduce building operating costs.

In some embodiments, a plurality of devices are operably (eg, communicatively) coupled to the control system. A plurality of devices may be located in a facility (eg, including a building and/or a room). A control system may include a hierarchy of controllers. A device may include an emitter, a sensor, or a window (eg, an IGU). The device can be any device as disclosed herein. At least two of the plurality of devices may be of the same type. For example, two or more IGUs can be coupled to the control system. At least two of the plurality of devices may be of different types. For example, sensors and transmitters may be coupled to a control system. A plurality of devices can sometimes comprise at least 20, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 2500, 5000, 7500, 10000, 50000, 100000, or 500000 devices. The plurality of devices can be any number between the aforementioned numbers (e.g., 20 devices to 500,000 devices, 20 devices to 50 devices, 50 devices to 500 devices, 500 devices to 2500 devices, 1000 devices to 5,000 devices, 5,000 to 10,000 devices, 10,000 to 100,000 devices, or 100,000 to 500,000 devices). For example, the number of windows in a floor can be at least 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40 or 50. The number of windows in a floor can be any number between the aforementioned numbers (eg, 5 to 50, 5 to 25, or 25 to 50). Sometimes, the installation may be in a multi-story building. At least a portion of the floors of a multistory building may have devices controlled by the control system (eg, at least a portion of the floors of a multistory building may be controlled by the control system). For example, a multi-storey building may have at least 2, 8, 10, 25, 50, 80, 100, 120, 140 or 160 floors controlled by the control system. The number of floors (eg, devices therein) controlled by the control system may be any number between the aforementioned numbers (eg, 2 to 50, 25 to 100, or 80 to 160). A floor may have an area of at least about 150 m ² , 250 m ² , 500 m ² , 1000 m ² , 1500 m ² , or 2000 square meters (m ² ). A floor may have an area between any of the aforementioned floor area values (eg, about 150 m ² to about 2000 m ² , about 150 m ² to about 500 m ² , about 250 m ² to about 1000 m 2 , or about 1000 m ² m ² to about 2000 m ² ). A building may comprise an area of at least about 1000 square feet (sqft), 2000 sqft, 5000 sqft, 10000 sqft, 100000 sqft, 150000 sqft, 200000 sqft, or 500000 sqft. A building can comprise an area between any of the above-mentioned areas (eg, about 1000 sqft to about 5000 sqft, about 5000 sqft to about 500000 sqft, or about 1000 sqft to about 500000 sqft). The building may comprise an area of at least about 100 m ² , 200 m ² , 500 m ² , 1000 m ² , 5000 m ² , 10000 m ² , 25000 m ² or 50000 m ² . The building may comprise an area between any of the above-mentioned areas (eg, about 100 m ² to about 1000 m ² , about 500 m ² to about 25000 m ² , about 100 m ² to about 50000 m ² ). Facilities can include commercial or residential buildings. Commercial buildings may include tenants and/or owners. Residential facilities may consist of multi-family or single-family buildings. Residential facilities may include residential complexes. Residential facilities may include single-family homes. Residential facilities may include multi-family homes (eg, condominiums). Residential facilities may include townhouses. A facility may contain residential and commercial components. A facility can comprise at least about 1, 2, 5, 10, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 420, 450, 500, or 550 windows (eg, tintable windows). The windows may be partitioned into partitions (e.g., based at least in part on the location, elevation, floor, ownership, utilization, any other assigned metric, random assignment, or any of the enclosures (e.g., rooms) in which they are placed Combining. The assignment of windows to partitions can be static or dynamic (eg, based on heuristics). There can be at least about 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 30, 40, or 46 windows per partition.

In some embodiments, a local controller (eg, window controller) is integrated with the BMS. A local controller may be directly connected to a device (eg, without any (eg, lower-level) intervening controller between the local controller and the device). For example, a local controller may be configured to control one or more devices of a facility. For example, a window controller can be configured to control one or more tintable windows (eg, electrochromic windows). In one embodiment, the one or more electrochromic windows include at least one all-solid-state and inorganic electrochromic device, but may include more than one electrochromic device, for example, where each window or pane of the IGU can be coloring. In one embodiment, one or more electrochromic windows include only all solid state and inorganic electrochromic devices. In one embodiment, the electrochromic window is a multi-state electrochromic window. Examples of tintable windows can be found in US Patent Application Serial No. 12/851,514, filed August 5, 2010, and entitled "MULTIPANE ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS," which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In some embodiments, one or more devices, such as sensors, emitters, and/or actuators, are operatively coupled to at least one controller and/or processor. Sensor readings may be obtained by one or more processors and/or controllers. A controller may include a processing unit (eg, CPU or GPU). The controller can receive input (eg, from at least one device or projection medium). A controller may include circuitry, electrical wiring, optical wiring, sockets and/or receptacles. A controller can receive input and/or deliver output. A controller may contain multiple (eg, child) controllers. Operations (eg, as disclosed herein) may be performed by a single controller or by a plurality of controllers. At least two operations may each be performed by different controllers. At least two operations can be performed by the same controller. A device and/or media can be controlled by a single controller or by multiple controllers. At least two devices and/or media can be controlled by different controllers. At least two devices and/or media can be controlled by the same controller. A controller can be part of a control system. The control system may include master controllers, floor (eg including network controllers) controllers, or local controllers. A local controller may be a target controller. For example, a local controller may be a window controller (eg, controlling an optically switchable window), an enclosure controller, or an assembly controller. The controller can be part of a hierarchical control system. A hierarchical control system may include a master controller that directs one or more controllers, such as floor controllers, local controllers (eg, window controllers), enclosure controllers, and/or component controllers. Targets can include devices or media. Devices may include electrochromic windows, sensors, emitters, antennas, receivers, transceivers, or actuators.

In some embodiments, the network infrastructure is operatively coupled to one or more controllers. In some embodiments, the physical location of controller types in the hierarchical control system changes. A controller may control (eg, directly couple to) one or more devices. A controller may be located proximate to the device or devices it is controlling. For example, a controller may control optically switchable devices (eg, IGUs), antennas, sensors, and/or output devices (eg, light sources, sound sources, odor sources, gas sources, HVAC outlets, or heaters). In one embodiment, a floor controller may direct one or more window controllers, one or more enclosure controllers, one or more component controllers, or any combination thereof. The floor controllers may include a floor controller. For example, a floor (eg, including network) controller may control a plurality of local (eg, including window) controllers. A plurality of local controllers may be located in a portion of a facility (eg, in a portion of a building). Part of the facility may be a floor of the facility. For example, floor controllers can be assigned to floors. In some embodiments, a floor may include a plurality of floor controllers, eg depending on the size of the floor and/or the number of local controllers coupled to the floor controllers. For example, a floor controller may be assigned to a portion of a floor. For example, floor controllers may be assigned to a portion of the local controllers located in the facility. For example, a floor controller may be assigned to a portion of a floor of a facility. The master controller can be coupled to one or more floor controllers. Floor controllers may be located in the facility. The master controller can be located in the facility or outside the facility. The main controller can be placed in the cloud. The controller may be part of or operatively coupled to a building management system. A controller may receive one or more inputs. A controller can generate one or more outputs. The controller can be a single-input single-output controller (SISO) or a multiple-input multiple-output controller (MIMO). The controller interprets the input signal it receives. A controller may obtain data from one or more components (eg, sensors). Obtaining can include receiving or fetching. Data may include measurements, estimates, determinations, generation, or any combination thereof. The controller may incorporate feedback control. The controller may incorporate feedforward control. Control may include on-off control, proportional control, proportional-integral (PI) control, or proportional-integral-derivative (PID) control. Control can comprise open loop control or closed loop control. The controller can include closed loop control. The controller may comprise open loop control. The controller can include a user interface. The user interface may include (or be operatively coupled to) a keyboard, keypad, mouse, touch screen, microphone, speech recognition package, camera, imaging system, or any combination thereof. Output can include a display (eg, screen), speakers, or a printer. In some embodiments, a local controller controls one or more devices and/or media (eg, media projection). For example, a local controller may control one or more IGUs, one or more sensors, one or more output devices (eg, one or more emitters), one or more media, or any combination thereof.

In some embodiments, the BMS includes a multipurpose controller. By incorporating feedback (eg, of a controller), a BMS can provide, for example, enhanced: 1) environmental control; 2) energy savings; 3) safety; 4) flexibility in control options; 5) improved reliability of other systems performance and useful life (e.g. due to reduced dependence on it and/or its maintenance); 6) information availability and/or diagnostics; 7) higher efficiency from people in the building (e.g. staff); and its various combinations. Such enhancements can automatically derive control of any of the devices. In some embodiments, a BMS may not be present. In some embodiments, the BMS may exist without communicating with the master network controller. In some embodiments, the BMS may communicate with a portion of a hierarchy of controllers. For example, the BMS can communicate (eg, at a high level) with the master network controller. In some embodiments, the BMS may not communicate with part of a hierarchy of controllers of the control system. For example, the BMS may not communicate with local controllers and/or intermediate controllers. In certain embodiments, maintenance of the BMS will not interrupt control of devices communicatively coupled to the control system. In some embodiments, the BMS includes at least one controller that may or may not be part of a hierarchical control system.

FIG. 1 shows an example of a control system architecture 100 disposed at least partially within an enclosure (eg, a building) 150 . The control system architecture 100 includes a master controller 108 that controls floor controllers 106 , which in turn control local controllers 104 . In the example shown in FIG. 1 , master controller 108 is operatively coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to building management system (BMS) 124 and database 120 . Arrows in Figure 1 indicate communication paths. The controller is operatively coupled (eg, directly/indirectly and/or wired and/or wirelessly) to the external source 110 . Master controller 108 may control floor controllers including network controller 106 , which may in turn control local controllers, such as window controllers 104 . The floor controller 106 may also include a network controller (NC). In some embodiments, a local controller (e.g., 106) controls one or more targets, such as IGU 102, one or more sensors, one or more output devices (e.g., one or more emitters), media or any combination thereof. External sources can include the Internet. The external source may include one or more sensors or output devices. External sources may include cloud-based applications and/or databases. Communication can be wired and/or wireless. External sources may be located outside the facility. For example, an external source may include one or more sensors and/or antennas disposed, for example, on a wall or ceiling of a facility. Communication can be one-way or two-way. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the communication of all communication arrows is intended to be bi-directional (eg, 118, 122, 114, and 112).

The methods, systems and/or apparatus described herein may include a control system. The control system can communicate with any of the devices described herein (eg, sensors). The sensors may be of the same type or of different types, eg, as described herein. For example, the control system can communicate with the first sensor and/or the second sensor. A plurality of devices (eg, sensors and/or emitters) may be disposed in a housing and may form a collective (eg, a digital architecture element). The group may contain at least two devices of the same type. The collective may comprise at least two devices of different types. The devices in the group are operatively coupled to the same electrical board. The electrical board may contain electrical circuits. The electrical board may include or be operatively coupled to a controller (eg, a local controller). A control system may control one or more devices (eg, sensors). A control system may control one or more components of a building management system (eg, lighting, security, and/or air conditioning systems). A controller may adjust at least one (eg, environmental) characteristic of the enclosure. The control system may use any component of the building management system to regulate the enclosure environment. For example, the control system can regulate the energy supplied by the heating element and/or the cooling element. For example, the control system may regulate the rate at which air flows to and/or from the enclosure through the vents. The control system can include a processor. A processor may be a processing unit. The controller may include a processing unit. The processing unit may be a central processing unit. The processing unit may include a central processing unit (abbreviated herein as "CPU"). The processing unit may be a graphics processing unit (abbreviated herein as "GPU"). A controller(s) or control mechanism (eg, including a computer system) can be programmed to implement one or more methods of the present invention. The processor can be programmed to implement the method of the present invention. A controller may control at least one component forming the systems and/or devices disclosed herein. Examples of digital architecture elements can be found in International Patent Application No. PCT/US20/70123, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

2 shows a schematic example of a computer system 200 programmed or otherwise configured for one or more operations of any of the methods provided herein. The computer system can control (eg, direct, monitor, and/or adjust) various features of the methods, apparatus, and systems of the present invention, such as controlling heating, cooling, lighting, and/or ventilation of enclosures, or any combination thereof. The computer system may be part of, or in communication with, any sensor or sensor collective disclosed herein. A computer may be coupled to one or more of the mechanisms disclosed herein and/or any portion thereof. For example, a computer may be coupled to one or more sensors, valves, switches, lights, windows (eg, IGUs), motors, pumps, optical components, or any combination thereof.

A computer system may include a processing unit (eg, 206) ("processor," "computer," and "computer processor" are also used herein). A computer system may include memory or memory locations (e.g., 202) (e.g., random access memory, read-only memory, flash memory), electronic storage units (e.g., 204) (e.g., hard drives), A communication interface (e.g., 203) for communicating with one or more other systems (e.g., a network adapter), and peripheral devices (e.g., 205), such as cache memory, other memory, data storage , and/or electronic display adapter. In the example shown in FIG. 2 , memory 202 , storage unit 204 , interface 203 , and peripheral device 205 communicate with processing unit 206 through a communication bus (solid line) such as a motherboard. The storage unit may be a data storage unit (or data repository) for storing data. The computer system may be operatively coupled to a computer network ("network") (eg, 201 ) by means of a communication interface. The network may be the Internet, the Internet and/or an inter-business network, or an intra-business network and/or an inter-business network in communication with the Internet. In some cases, the network is a telecommunications and/or data network. The network may include one or more computer servers that may enable distributed computing, such as cloud computing. In some cases, a network may implement a peer-to-peer network by means of a computer system, which may enable devices coupled to the computer system to behave as clients or servers.

The processing unit can execute a sequence of machine-readable instructions that can be embodied in a program or software. The instructions may be stored in a memory location, such as memory 202 . These instructions can be directed to a processing unit, which can then be programmed or otherwise configured to implement the methods of the invention. Examples of operations performed by a processing unit may include fetch, decode, execute, and write back. The processing unit can interpret and/or execute instructions. Processors can include microprocessors, data processors, central processing units (CPUs), graphics processing units (GPUs), system-on-chips (SOCs), co-processors, network processors, application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs) , Application Specific Instruction Set Processor (ASIP), Controller, Programmable Logic Device (PLD), Chipset, Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), or any combination thereof. The processing unit may be part of a circuit such as an integrated circuit. One or more other components of system 200 may be included in the circuit.

The storage unit can store files, such as drivers, libraries, and saved programs. The storage unit can store user data (eg, user preferences and user programs). In some cases, a computer system may include one or more additional data storage units that are external to the computer system, such as on remote servers that communicate with the computer system via an intranet or the Internet .

The computer system can communicate with one or more remote computer systems via a network. For example, a computer system can communicate with a user's (eg, operator's) remote computer system. Examples of remote computer systems include personal computers (e.g., laptop PCs), tablet or tablet PCs (e.g., Apple ^® iPad, Samsung ^® Galaxy Tab), telephones, smartphones (e.g., Apple ^® iPhone, Android-enabled devices, Blackberry ^® ), or personal digital assistants. Users (eg, clients) can access the computer system via the network.

Methods as described herein may be implemented by machine (e.g., computer processor) executable code stored in an electronic storage location of a computer system, such as, for example, in memory 202 or an electronic storage unit 204 on. Machine-executable or machine-readable code may be provided in software. During use, the processor 206 can execute program code. In some cases, program code may be retrieved from the storage unit and stored on memory ready for access by the processor. In some cases, electronic storage units may be eliminated and machine-executable instructions stored on memory.

The code can be precompiled and configured for use on a machine with a processor adapted to execute the code, or can be compiled during the execution phase. The code may be provided in a programming language which may be selected such that the code may be executed in a precompiled or as-compiled manner. In some embodiments, the processor includes program code. The codes can be program instructions. Programmed instructions may cause at least one processor (eg, computer) to direct the feedforward and/or feedback control loops. In some embodiments, the programmed instructions cause at least one processor to direct closed loop and/or open loop control schemes. Control may be based at least in part on one or more sensor readings (eg, sensor data). One controller can direct multiple operations. At least two operations may be directed by different controllers. In some embodiments, different controllers may direct at least two of operations (a), (b) and (c). In some embodiments, different controllers may direct at least two of operations (a), (b) and (c). In some embodiments, the non-transitory computer-readable medium causes a respective computer to boot at least two of operations (a), (b), and (c). In some embodiments, different non-transitory computer-readable media cause each different computer to boot at least two of operations (a), (b), and (c). The controller and/or computer-readable medium can direct any of the apparatuses disclosed herein, or components thereof. A controller and/or computer-readable medium can direct any operations of the methods disclosed herein. The controller is operatively (communicatively) coupled to control logic (eg, code embedded in software) in which its operation is embodied.

In some embodiments, the optically switchable window forms or occupies a substantial portion of the building envelope. For example, optically switchable windows may form a substantial portion of the walls, facades and even roofs of corporate offices, other commercial buildings, or residential buildings. A distributed network of controllers can be used to control optically switchable windows. For example, a network system is operable to control a plurality of IGUs. One of the main functions of the network system is to control the optical state of the electrochromic device (ECD) (or other optically switchable device) within the IGU. In some implementations, one or more windows can be multi-zone windows, eg, where each window includes two or more independently controllable ECDs or zones. In some embodiments, the network system 300 (of FIG. 3 ) is operable to control the electrical characteristics of the power signal provided to the IGU. For example, the network system may generate and communicate tinting commands (also referred to herein as "tint commands") that control the voltage applied to the ECDs within the IGU.

In some embodiments, another function of the network system is to obtain status information from the IGU (hereinafter, "information" may be used interchangeably with "data"). For example, the status information for a given IGU may include an identification of or information about the current tint status of the ECDs within the IGU. The network system can also be used to obtain data from various sensors such as temperature sensors, photosensors (also referred to herein as light sensors), Humidity sensors, air flow sensors or occupancy sensors, whether integrated on or within the IGU or at various other locations in, on or around the building.

A networked system may include any suitable number of distributed controllers having various capabilities or functions. In some implementations, the functions and configurations of the various controllers are defined hierarchically. For example, a network system may include a plurality of distributed window controllers (WC), a plurality of network controllers (NC) and a master controller (MC). Network controllers may be included in floor controllers. In some implementations, the MC can communicate with and control tens or hundreds of NCs. In various implementations, the MC issues high-level instructions to the NC via one or more wired and/or wireless links. Such instructions may include, for example, tint commands for causing optical state transitions of IGUs controlled by respective NCs. Each NC can in turn communicate with and control several WCs via one or more wired and/or wireless links. For example, each NC can control dozens or hundreds of WCs. Each WC, in turn, can communicate with, drive, or otherwise control one or more individual IGUs via one or more wired and/or wireless links.

In some embodiments, the MC issues communications including hue commands, status request commands, data (eg, sensor data) request commands, or other instructions. The MC 308 may be periodically, at certain predetermined times of the day (which may vary based at least in part on the day of the week or year), or based at least in part on the detection of a particular event, condition, or event or condition Combinations of (e.g., as determined by acquired sensor data, or based at least in part on receipt of a request initiated by the user or by an application, or a combination of this sensor data and this request) such communications. In some embodiments, when the MC determines to change the hue state in a set of one or more IGUs, the MC generates or selects a hue value corresponding to the desired hue state. In some embodiments, the set of IGUs is associated with a first protocol identifier (ID) (eg, BACnet ID). Then, the MC generates and transmits a communication including the hue value and the first protocol ID—herein referred to as a “primary hue command”—over the connection via a first communication protocol (eg, BACnet compatible protocol). The MC can address keytone commands to specific NCs that control specific one or more WCs, which in turn control the set of IGUs to transition.

In some embodiments, the NC receives a key tone command including a hue value and a first protocol ID, and maps the first protocol ID to one or more second protocol IDs. Each of the second protocol IDs may identify a corresponding one of the WCs. The NC may then transmit an auxiliary hue command including the hue value to each of the identified WCs over the connection via the second communication protocol. For example, each of the WCs receiving the auxiliary tint command may then select a voltage or current profile from internal memory based at least in part on the tint value to drive its respective connected IGU to a tint state consistent with the tint value. For example, each of the WCs may then generate voltage or current signals and provide these signals via links to their respective connected IGUs to apply voltage or current profiles.

In some embodiments, various targets (eg, IGUs) are (eg, advantageously) grouped into regions of targets (eg, within EC windows). At least one zone (eg, each of the zones) may include a subset of targets (eg, IGUs). For example, at least one (e.g., each) zone of a target (e.g., IGU) may be controlled by one or more individual floor controllers (e.g., NC) and one or more controlled by a respective local controller (eg, WC). In some examples, at least one (e.g., each) zone may be controlled by a single floor controller (e.g., NC) and two or more local controllers (e.g., WC) control. For example, a zone may represent a logical grouping of targets (eg, IGUs). Each zone may correspond to a particular location or area of a building that is a collection of objects (eg, IGUs) that drive together based at least in part on their locations. For example, a building may have four sides or sides (north, south, east, and west) and ten floors. In this teaching example, each zone may correspond to a collection of electrochromic windows on a particular floor and on a particular one of the four sides. At least one (eg, each) zone may correspond to a collection of objects (eg, IGUs) that share one or more physical characteristics (eg, device parameters such as size or age). In some embodiments, regions of objects (e.g., IGUs) are grouped based at least in part on one or more non-physical characteristics such as security designation or business class (e.g., IGUs delimiting a manager's office may be grouped in a or multiple zones, while IGUs delimiting non-manager offices may be grouped in one or more different zones).

In some embodiments, at least one (e.g., each) floor controller (e.g., NC) is capable of addressing all objects (e.g., IGU). For example, the MC may issue a key tone command to a floor controller (eg, NC) controlling the target zone. A primary shading command may include an (eg, abstract) identification of a target partition (also referred to hereinafter as a "partition ID"). For example, the partition ID may be a first protocol ID such as that just described in the example above. In such cases, a floor controller (e.g., NC) receives a master hue command including a hue value and a zone ID, and maps the zone ID to a second protocol associated with a local controller (e.g., WC) in the zone ID. In some embodiments, the partition ID is a higher level of abstraction than the first protocol ID. In such cases, a floor controller (eg, NC) may first map a zone ID to one or more first agreement IDs, and then map the first agreement IDs to a second agreement ID.

In some embodiments, the MC is coupled to one or more outward facing networks via one or more wired and/or wireless links. For example, the MC can communicate the acquired status information or sensor data to a remote computer, mobile device, server, externally facing network, or a database accessible from the externally facing network. In some embodiments, various applications executing within such remote devices, including third-party applications or cloud-based applications, can access data from or provide data to the MC. In some embodiments, an authorized user or application communicates a request to modify the hue state of various IGUs to the MC via the network. For example, the MC may first determine whether to grant a hue command (eg, based at least in part on power considerations or based at least in part on whether the user has proper authorization) before issuing the hue command. The MC may then calculate, determine, select, or otherwise generate a hue value and transmit the hue value in a master hue command to cause a hue state transition in the associated IGU.

In some embodiments, the user submits this request from a computing device such as a desktop computer, laptop computer, tablet computer, or mobile device (eg, smartphone). A user's computing device may execute a client-side application capable of communicating with the MC, and in some instances, a host controller application executing within the MC. In some embodiments, the client-side application may communicate with a separate application in the same or different physical device or system as the MC, which then communicates with the master controller application to affect desired hue state modifications. For example, a main controller application or other separate application may be used to authenticate a user to authorize requests submitted by the user. The user can select a target to be manipulated (eg, an IGU to be colored), and inform the MC of this selection, either directly or indirectly, eg, by entering an enclosure ID (eg, room number) through a client-side application.

In some embodiments, a user's nomadic circuitry (eg, mobile electronic device or other computing device) may communicate, eg, wirelessly, with various local controllers (eg, WC). For example, a client-side application executing within a user's mobile circuit (e.g., a mobile device) may transmit wireless communications including control signals associated with a target to a local controller to control the target, which is communicatively coupled to the Local controller (eg, via network). For example, a user may initiate a hue state control signal to the WC to control the hue state of individual IGUs connected to the WC. For example, a user may use a client-side application to control (eg, maintain or modify) the tint status of IGUs adjacent to a room occupied by the user (or to be occupied by the user or others at a future time). For example, a user may initially direct a sensor frequency change control signal to a local controller to control the data sampling rate of a sensor communicatively coupled to the local controller. For example, a user may use a client-side application to control (eg, maintain or modify) the data sampling rate of sensors adjacent to a room occupied by the user (or to be occupied by the user or others at a future time). For example, a user may initiate directing a light intensity change control signal to a local controller to control the light of a lamp communicatively coupled to the local controller. For example, a user may use a client-side application to control (eg, maintain or modify) the light intensity of lights adjacent to a room occupied by the user (or to be occupied by the user or others at a future time). For example, a user may initiate directing a media projection change control signal to a local controller to control media projected by a projector communicatively coupled to the local controller. For example, a user may use a client-side application to control (eg, maintain or modify) media projected by a projector in a room occupied by the user (or to be occupied by the user or others at a future time). For example, various wireless network topologies and protocols may be used to generate, format and/or transmit wireless communications.

In some embodiments, a control signal sent from a user's nomadic circuit (e.g., device) (or other computing device) to a local controller (e.g., WC) modifies a previously sent signal (e.g., previously sent by a WC from a respective NC). received hue value). The previously sent signal can eg be automatically generated by the control system. In other words, the local controller (eg, WC) may, for example, be based at least in part on a control signal from a user's mobile circuit (eg, a user's computing device) rather than at least in part on a predetermined signal (eg, a hue value). The applied voltage is provided to the target (eg, IGU). For example, a control algorithm or set of rules stored in and executed by a local controller (e.g., a WC) may instruct one or more The control signal will take precedence over the respective signal received from the control system (eg tone value received from NC). In some embodiments, control signals (such as hue values from the NC) are prioritized over receipt by the local controller (e.g., WC) from the user's mobile circuit (e.g., the user's computing device), such as in high demand situations any control signal. A control algorithm or set of rules may indicate that changes to control signals (eg, hue-related) from only certain users (or groups or classes of users) may be prioritized based at least in part on the permissions granted to such users. In some cases, other factors including the time of day or the location of the target (eg, IGU) may affect the authority to alter the predetermined signal of the control system.

In some embodiments, based at least in part on receiving control signals from a user's mobile circuit (e.g., an authorized user's computing device), the MC uses information about combinations of known parameters to calculate, determine, select and/or Command signals are otherwise generated (eg, related to hue values) such as to provide (eg, lighting) conditions requested by (eg, typical) users, while in some cases also requiring efficient use of power. For example, the MC may determine the state of the object based at least in part on preset preferences defined by or for the particular user requesting the object state change via the mobile circuit (eg, via the computing device). For example, the MC may determine the hue value based at least in part on preset preferences defined by or for the particular user requesting the hue state change via the computing device. For example, a user may be required to type a password or otherwise log in or obtain authorization to request a change in state of an object (eg, a hue state change). The MC may determine a user's identity based at least in part on a password, security token, and/or identifier for a particular mobile circuit (eg, a mobile device or other computing device). After determining the user's identity, the MC can then retrieve the user's default preferences and use the default preferences alone or in combination with other parameters (such as power considerations and/or information from various sensors) to generate and transmit The state of the object changes (eg, the hue value used to render the respective IGU).

In some embodiments, the network system includes wall switches, dimmers, or other (eg, tint state) control devices. A wall switch generally refers to an electromechanical interface to a local controller (eg, WC). The wall switch can communicate a target state change (eg, hue) command to a local controller (eg, WC), which can then communicate a target state change (eg, hue) command to a local controller such as a local controller (eg, NC) The upper level controller of the . Such control devices may be collectively referred to as "wall devices", although such devices are not necessarily limited to wall-mounted implementations (for example, such devices may also be located on a ceiling or floor or integrated on or in a table or conference table). For example, some or all of an office, conference room, or other room in a building may include such a wall device for controlling the state of an object (eg, the tint state of an adjacent IGU, or the brightness of a light bulb). For example, IGUs adjacent to a particular room can be grouped into a zone. Each of the wall devices can be operated by an end user (eg, an occupant of a respective room) to control the status of the grouped objects (eg, control the tint status or other function or parameter of an IGU in an adjacent room). For example, at certain times of day, adjacent IGUs may be tinted to a dark state to reduce the amount of light energy entering the room from the outside (eg, to reduce AC cooling requirements). For example, during certain times of the day, adjacent heaters may be turned on to achieve warmer temperatures to promote occupant comfort. In some embodiments, when a user requests access to a room, the user may manipulate the wall device to communicate one or more control signals to cause a transition (e.g., a tint state) from one state of the object to another state (e.g., From the dark state of the IGU to the lighter toned state).

In some embodiments, each wall fixture includes one or more switches, buttons, dimmers, dials, or buttons that enable the user to select a particular tint state or to increase or decrease the current tint level of an IGU in an adjacent room. Other entity UI controls. The wall device may include a display with a touch screen interface that enables the user to select a particular tint state (e.g., by selecting a virtual button, selecting from a drop-down menu, or by typing in a tint level or tint percentage), or Modify the tint state (for example, by selecting the "Dim" virtual button, the "Lighten" virtual button, or by turning a virtual dial or sliding a virtual bar). In some embodiments, the wall device includes a docking interface that enables a user to physically and communicatively dock a mobile circuit (e.g., a portable device such as a smartphone, multimedia device, remote controller, virtual reality device, Tablets or other portable computing devices (eg, IPHONE, IPOD, or IPAD manufactured by Apple, Inc., Cupertino, California)). Mobile circuits can be embedded in vehicles (eg, cars, motorcycles, drones, airplanes). Mobility circuits can be embedded in robots. Circuitry may be embedded in (eg, part of) virtual assistant AI technology, speakers (eg, smart speakers such as Google Nest or Amazon Echo Dot). The coupling of the mobile circuit to the network may be initiated by the user's presence in the enclosure or by the user's coupling (eg, whether remotely or locally) to the network. The user's coupling to the network can be secure (eg, have one or more layers of security, and/or require one or more security tokens (eg, keys)). The presence of a user in an enclosure can be sensed (eg, automatically) by using sensors coupled to a network. A minimum distance from sensors that the user couples to the network can be predetermined and/or adjusted. Users can change their connection to the network. Users can be administrators, executors, owners, lessors, and administrators of the network and/or facilities. A user may be a user of a mobile circuit. The ability to couple the mobile circuit to the network may or may not be altered by the user. The ability to change the minimum coupling distance between the mobile circuit and the network may or may not be changed by the user. There may be hierarchies of modification permissions. The class may depend on the type of user and/or the type of mobile circuitry. For example, factory employee users may not be allowed to change the coupling of production machinery to the network. For example, employees may be allowed to change the coupling distance of their company laptops to the network. For example, employees may have permissions to allow or prevent their personal cellular phones and/or cars from coupling to the network. For example, visitors can be prevented from connecting their mobile circuits to the Internet. Coupling to the network can be automatic and seamless (eg, after initial preferences have been set). Seamless coupling can occur without input from the user.

In this example, the user can control the tint level via input to the mobile circuit (e.g., a portable device), which is then received by the wall device through the docking interface and then communicated to the control system (e.g., to MC, NC or WC). A mobile circuit (eg, a portable device) may include an application for communicating with an API presented by the wall device.

In some embodiments, the wall device may transmit a state change (eg, tint state change) request to the object to the control system (eg, to the MC). A control system (eg, MC) may first determine whether to grant the request (eg, based at least in part on power considerations and/or based at least in part on whether the user has proper authorization or authority). A control system (e.g., MC) may calculate, determine, select, and/or otherwise generate a state change (e.g., hue) value and transmit the state change (e.g., hue) value in a master state change (e.g., hue) command To cause the target to change (for example, to change the hue state of an adjacent IGU). For example, each wall unit may be connected via one or more wired links (e.g., via communication lines such as CAN or Ethernet compatible lines and/or via power lines using power line communication techniques) to a control system (e.g., one of MC) connection. For example, each wall device may be connected to a control system (eg, MC therein) via one or more wireless links. The wall device may be connected (via one or more wired and/or wireless connections) to an outward facing network which may communicate with a control system (eg, MC therein) via a link.

In some embodiments, the control system identifies a target (eg, a target device) associated with the wall device based at least in part on previously programmed or discovered information associating the wall device with the target. For example, the MC identifies the IGU associated with the wall device based at least in part on previously programmed or discovered information associating the wall device with the IGU. For example, a control algorithm or set of rules may be stored in and executed by a control system (e.g., the MC therein) to direct one or more control signals from the wall device to take precedence over those previously issued by the control system (e.g., the MC therein). MC) produces hue values. During times of high demand (e.g., high power demand), a control algorithm or set of rules stored in and executed by the control system (e.g., the MC therein) can be used to instruct The generated tone value takes precedence over any control signal received from the wall unit.

In some embodiments, based at least in part on receiving a request or control signal from the wall device to change the target state (e.g., a tint state change request or control signal), the control system (e.g., the MC therein) uses information about known parameters. The information is combined to produce state change (eg, tint) values that provide typical user-desired lighting conditions. Therefore, the control system (eg, MC therein) can use power more efficiently. In some embodiments, the control system (e.g., the MC therein) may be based at least in part on preset preferences defined by or for the particular user requesting a change in state (e.g., hue) of the object via the wall device. Produces a state change (eg, hue) value. For example, the user may be required to key a password into the wall device, or use a security token or security key fob (such as an IBUTTON or other 1-Wire device) to access the wall device. The control system (eg, the MC therein) can then determine the identity of the user based at least in part on the password, security token, and/or security key fob. The control system (eg, MC therein) can retrieve the user's default preferences. A control system (eg, MC therein) can use preset preferences alone or in combination with other parameters such as power considerations or information from various sensors, historical data, and/or user preferences to calculate, determine, select, and/or Or otherwise generate tone values for individual IGUs.

In some embodiments, the wall device transmits the tint state change request to the appropriate control system (eg, to the NC therein). A lower level of the control system (eg, the NC therein) may communicate the request, or a communication based at least in part on the request, to a higher level of the control system (eg, to the MC). For example, each wall device may be connected to a corresponding NC via one or more wired links. In some embodiments, the wall device transmits the request to the appropriate NC, which then determines itself whether to modify the primary hue command previously received from the MC or the primary or secondary hue command previously generated by the NC. As described below, the NC may generate the hue commands without first receiving the hue commands from the MC. In some embodiments, the wall device communicates the request or control signal directly to the WC controlling the adjacent IGU. For example, each wall device may be connected to a corresponding WC via one or more wired links such as those just described for the MC, or via a wireless link.

In some embodiments, the NC or MC determines whether a control signal from the wall device should take precedence over a hue value previously generated by the NC or MC. As described above, the wall device is capable of direct communication with the NC. However, in some examples, the wall device may communicate the request directly to the MC or directly to the WC, which in turn communicates the request to the NC. In some embodiments, the wall device is capable of communicating the request to a customer-facing network (such as a network managed by the owner or operator of the building), which then, via the MC, communicates the request (or requests based on it) ) directly or indirectly to the NC. For example, a control algorithm or set of rules stored in and executed by the NC or MC may dictate that one or more control signals from the wall device take precedence over tint values previously generated by the NC or MC. In some embodiments (eg, such as during times of high demand), a control algorithm or set of rules stored in and executed by the NC or MC dictates that hue values previously generated by the NC or MC take precedence over those received from the wall device. any control signal.

In some embodiments, based at least in part on receiving a tint state change request or control signal from the wall device, the NC may use information about combinations of known parameters to generate tint values that provide typical user-desired lighting conditions. In some embodiments, the NC or MC generates the hue value based at least in part on preset preferences defined by or for the particular user requesting the hue state change via the wall device. For example, the user may be required to key a password into the wall device, or use a security token or security key fob (such as an IBUTTON or other 1-Wire device) to access the wall device. In this example, the NC may communicate with the MC to determine the user's identity, or the MC may solely determine the user's identity based at least in part on a password, security token, or security key fob. The MC can then retrieve the user's default preferences, and use the default preferences alone or in combination with other parameters, such as power considerations or information from various sensors, to calculate, determine, select, or otherwise generate for each Differentiate the tone value of the IGU.

In some embodiments, the control system (eg, MC therein) is coupled to an external database (or "data storage" or "data repository"). The database may be a local database coupled to the control system (eg, the MC therein) via, for example, a wired hard link. In some embodiments, the database is a remote or cloud-based database accessible by the control system (eg, the MC therein) via an internal private network or via an outward facing network. Other computing devices, systems or servers can also be accessed, for example via an outward facing network, to read the data stored in the database. One or more controlling applications or third-party applications can also access through the outward facing network to read the data stored in the database. In some embodiments, the control system (eg, the MC therein) stores a record of all tint commands including the corresponding tint value issued by the control system (eg, the MC therein) in a database. The control system (eg, MC therein) can also collect status and sensor data and store it in a database (which can constitute historical data). A local controller (e.g., WC) can collect sensor data and/or status data from the enclosure and/or from other devices (e.g., IGUs) or media housed in the enclosure, and send sensor data to the sensor via a communication link. Data and/or status information is communicated to respective higher level controllers (eg, NC). Data can move up the chain of control, for example to the MC. For example, a controller (e.g., NC or MC) may itself be communicatively coupled (e.g., connected) to various sensors within the building (such as light, temperature, or occupancy sensors), as well as positioned on the building Sensors (eg, light and/or temperature) in, around, or otherwise outside a building (eg, on a roof of a building). In some embodiments, the control system (eg, NC or WC) may also transmit status and/or sensor data (eg, directly) to a database for storage.

In some embodiments, the networked system is adapted to integrate with smart thermostat services, warning services (eg, fire detection), security services, and/or other appliance automation services. One example of a home automation service is ^NEST® ( ^NEST® is a registered trademark of Google, Inc., Mountain View, CA) offered by Nest Labs of Palo Alto, CA. As used herein, in some implementations, references to BMS may also encompass or be replaced by such other automated services.

In some embodiments, an e-control system (eg, MC therein) and individual automation services such as a BMS may communicate via an application programming interface (API). For example, the API may execute in conjunction with a (eg, master) controller application (or platform) within a controller (eg, MC) and/or in conjunction with a building management application (or platform) within a BMS. The controller (eg, MC) and BMS may communicate via one or more wired links and/or via an outward facing network. For example, the BMS may communicate instructions for controlling the IGU to a controller (e.g., MC), which then generates and transmits the master state (e.g., hue) commands of the target to the appropriate lower-level control(s) device (for example, to NC). A lower hierarchical level controller (eg, NC or WC) can communicate directly with the BMS (eg, communicate wirelessly via a wired/hard link and/or wirelessly via a wireless data link). In some embodiments, the BMS also receives data collected by one or more of the controllers in the control system (e.g., by the MC, NC, and/or WC), such as sensor data, status data, and associated time Click on the information. For example, a controller (eg, MC) can distribute this data over a network. In some embodiments where the data is stored in a database, the BMS can access some or all of the data stored in the database.

In some embodiments, a controller (eg, "MC") collectively refers to any suitable combination of hardware, firmware, and software for implementing described functions, operations, procedures, or capabilities. For example, an MC may refer to a computer that implements a master controller application (also referred to herein as a "program" or "task"). For example, a controller (eg, MC) may include one or more processors. A processor can be or include a central processing unit (CPU), such as a single-core or multi-core processor. In some examples, the processor may additionally include a digital signal processor (DSP) or a network processor. A processor may also include one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs). The processor is coupled to the main memory, the auxiliary memory, the inward facing network interface and the outward facing network interface. The main level memory may include one or more high speed memory devices, such as one including a dynamic RAM (DRAM) device or more random access memory (RAM) devices. Such DRAM devices may include, for example, Synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) devices and Double Data Rate SDRAM (DDR SDRAM) devices (including DDR2 SDRAM, DDR3 SDRAM, and DDR4 SDRAM), Thyristor RAM (T-RAM), and Zero Capacitor (Z- RAM ^® ), and other suitable memory devices.

In some embodiments, secondary memory may include one or more hard disk drives (HDD) or one or more solid state drives (SSD). In some embodiments, the memory may store processor-executable code (or "programmed instructions") for implementing a multitasking operating system, such as, for example, an operating system based at least in part on the ^Linux® kernel. The operating system may be a UNIX® ^- based or Unix-like operating system, a Microsoft Windows® ^- based operating system, or another suitable operating system. The memory may also store code executable by the processor to implement the host controller application described above, as well as code to implement other applications or programs. The memory may also store status information, sensor data, or other data collected from network controllers, window controllers, and various sensors.

In some embodiments, the controller (eg, MC) is a "headless" system; that is, a computer that does not include a display monitor or other user input device. For example, an administrator or other authorized user may log in or otherwise access a controller (e.g., MC) via a network from a remote computer or mobile computing device to access and retrieve data stored in the controller (e.g., MC), write or otherwise store data in a controller (e.g., MC), and/or control functions, operations, procedures and/or functions implemented or used by a controller (e.g., MC) or parameters. A controller (eg, MC) may include a display monitor and direct user input devices (eg, mouse, keyboard, and/or touch screen).

In some embodiments, an inward facing network interface enables one controller (eg, MC) of the control system to communicate with various distributed controllers and/or various objects (eg, sensors). Inward facing network interfaces may collectively refer to one or more wired network interfaces and/or one or more wireless network interfaces (including one or more radio transceivers). For example, an inward facing network interface may enable communication with a downstream controller (eg, NC) over a link. Downstream may refer to a lower level of control in the hierarchy of control.

In some embodiments, an outward-facing network interface enables the controller (e.g., MC) to communicate with various computers, mobile circuits (e.g., mobile devices), servers, databases, and/or Cloud-based database system communication. Outward facing network interfaces may collectively refer to one or more wired network interfaces and/or one or more wireless network interfaces (including one or more radio transceivers). In some embodiments, various applications executing within such remote devices, including third-party applications and/or cloud-based applications, may access data from a controller (e.g., MC) or provide data to Access data from or provide data to the database to or via a controller (eg, MC). For example, a controller (eg, MC) may include one or more application programming interfaces (APIs) for facilitating communication between the controller (eg, MC) and various third-party applications. Some examples of APIs that can be enabled by a controller(s) (eg, MC) can be found in International Patent Application No. PCT/US15/64555 entitled "MULTIPLE INTERACTING SYSTEMS AT A SITE" filed December 8, 2015 No. (Attorney Docket No. VIEWP073WO), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. For example, third-party applications may include various monitoring services, including thermostat services, alarm services (eg, fire detection), security services, and/or other appliance automation services. Additional examples of monitoring services and systems can be found in International Patent Application No. PCT/US15/19031, filed March 5, 2015, entitled "MONITORING SITES CONTAINING SWITCHABLE OPTICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLLERS" (Attorney Docket No. VIEWP061WO ), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In some embodiments, one or both of the inward facing network interface and the outward facing network interface may comprise a building automation and control network (BACnet) compatible interface. BACnet is a communication protocol commonly used in building automation and control networks and defined by the ASHRAE/ANSI 135 and ISO 16484-5 standards. The BACnet protocol broadly provides mechanisms for computerized building automation systems and devices to exchange information, eg, regardless of the specific service they perform. For example, BACnet can be used to implement (i) heating, ventilation, and air conditioning control (HVAC) systems, (ii) lighting control systems, (iii) access and/or security control systems, (iv) fire detection systems, or (v) ) any combination thereof and communications between its associated devices. In some examples, one or both of the inward-facing and outward-facing web interfaces may include an Open Building Information Exchange (oBIX) compliant interface or another RESTful web service based interface.

In some embodiments, a controller (e.g., MC) may calculate, determine, select, and/or otherwise generate a preferred state for a target (e.g., for one or more IGUs) based at least in part on a combination of parameters. hue value). For example, the combination of parameters may include time and/or calendar information, such as time of day, day of year, or time of season. The combination of parameters may include Gregorian information such as the direction of the sun relative to the facility and/or target (eg, IGU). can be based at least in part by a controller (e.g., MC) on, for example, time and/or calendar information, along with information about the geographic location of the facility (e.g., building) on Earth and the direction in which the target (e.g., IGU) is facing (e.g., in North - East-Down coordinate system) to determine the direction of the sun relative to the facility and/or object (e.g., IGU). The combination of parameters may also include external and/or internal environmental conditions. For example, external temperature (outside the building), internal temperature (in a room adjacent to the target IGU), or the temperature within the internal volume of the IGU. The combination of parameters may include information about the weather (eg, whether the weather is clear, sunny, cloudy, cloudy, raining, or snowing). Parameters such as time of day, day of year, and/or direction of the sun can be programmed into and tracked by a control system (eg, an MC therein). Parameters such as external temperature, internal temperature, and/or IGU temperature may be obtained from sensors in, on, or around the building or sensors integrated with the target (eg, on or within the IGU). Sometimes a target can contain sensors. Examples of algorithms, routines, modules, or other means for generating IGU tone values are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 13/772,969, filed February 21, 2013, entitled "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS" No., and International Patent Application No. PCT/US15/29675 filed on May 7, 2015 entitled "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS", the entire contents of each of which are hereby incorporated by reference into this article.

In some embodiments, at least one (eg, each) device (eg, ECD) within each IGU can be colored, eg, in response to an appropriate drive voltage applied across the EC stack. A hue can be (eg, virtually) any hue state within the continuous tone spectrum defined by the material properties of the EC stack. However, a control system (eg, MC therein) may be programmed to select a hue value from a finite number of discrete hue values (eg, hue values specified as integer values). In some such implementations, the number of available discrete hue values may be at least 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 or greater. For example, a 2-bit binary number can be used to specify any of four possible integer hue values, a 3-bit binary number can be used to specify any of eight possible integer hue values, a 4-bit binary number can be used to specify any of sixteen possible integer hue values, a 5-bit binary number can be used to specify any of thirty-two possible integer hue values, and so on. At least one (eg, each) tint value can be associated with a target tint level (eg, expressed as a percentage of maximum tint, maximum safe tint, and/or maximum desired or available tint). For pedagogical purposes, consider an example where the MC chooses from among four available hue values: 0, 5, 10, and 15 (using 4-bit or higher binary numbers). Hue values of 0, 5, 10, and 15 can be aligned with target tint levels of 60%, 40%, 20%, and 4%, or 60%, 30%, 10%, and 1%, respectively, or another desired, favorable, or appropriate associated with the set of target tone levels.

FIG. 3 shows a block diagram of an example master controller (MC) 300 . MC 300 may be implemented in or as one or more computers, computing devices, or computer systems (used interchangeably herein as appropriate unless otherwise indicated). For example, MC 300 includes one or more processors 302 (hereinafter also collectively referred to as "processors 302"). Processor 302 may be or include a central processing unit (CPU), such as a single-core or multi-core processor. In some examples, processor 302 may additionally include a digital signal processor (DSP) or a network processor. Processor 302 may also include one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs). Processor 302 is coupled to main memory 304 , secondary memory 306 , inward-facing network interface 308 , and outward-facing network interface 310 . The main memory 304 may include one or more high-speed memory devices, such as one including a dynamic RAM (DRAM) device or a plurality of random access memory (RAM) devices. Such DRAM devices may include, for example, Synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) devices and Double Data Rate SDRAM (DDR SDRAM) devices (including DDR2 SDRAM, DDR3 SDRAM, and DDR4 SDRAM), Thyristor RAM (T-RAM), and Zero Capacitor (Z- RAM ^® ), and other suitable memory devices.

In some embodiments, in some implementations, the MC and NC are implemented as a master controller application and a network controller application, respectively, executing within respective physical computers or other hardware devices. For example, each of the host controller application and the network controller application may be implemented within the same physical hardware. Each of the main controller application and the network controller application may be implemented as separate tasks executing within a single computer device comprising a multi-tasking operating system, such as an operating system based at least in part on the ^Linux® kernel or another suitable operating system.

In some embodiments, the host controller application and the network controller application can communicate through an application programming interface (API). In some embodiments, the host controller communicates with the network controller application via a loopback interface. By way of reference, a loopback interface is a virtual network interface implemented by the operating system that enables communication between applications executing within the same device. The loopback interface is usually identified by an IP address (often in the 127.0.0.0/8 address block in IPv4, or the 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 address in IPv6 (also denoted as: 1) Middle) identification. For example, the host controller application and the network controller application may each be programmed to send communications directed to each other to the IP address of the loopback interface. In this way, the communication does not need to leave the computer when the host controller application sends the communication to the network controller application or vice versa.

In some embodiments where the MC and NC are implemented as master controller and network controller applications, respectively, there are generally no restrictions that limit the available protocols for communication between the two applications. This is generally true regardless of whether the main controller application and the network controller application execute as tasks in the same or different physical computers. For example, there is no need to use a broadcast protocol such as BACnet, which limits communication to one network segment as defined by a switch or router boundary. For example, the oBIX communication protocol may be used in some implementations for communication between the MC and NC.

In some embodiments, each of the NCs is implemented as an instance of a network controller application executing as a task within a respective physical computer. In some embodiments, at least one of the computers executing the instance of the network controller application also executes the instance of the host controller application to implement the MC. For example, while only one instance of the master controller application may be actively executing in the network system at any given time, two or more of the computers running instances of the network controller application may An instance where the main controller application is installed. In this way, redundancy is added so that the computer currently executing the master controller application is no longer a single point of failure for the overall system. For example, if the computer running the master controller application fails or if that particular instance of the master controller application otherwise stops functioning, another of the computers on which the master web application's execution instance is installed may Start executing the master controller application to take over from another failed instance. In some embodiments, more than one instance of the host controller application may execute in parallel. For example, functions, procedures, or operations of the main controller application may be distributed to two (or more) executions of the main controller application.

4 shows a block diagram of an example network controller (NC) 400, which may be implemented in one or more network components, network connection devices, computers, computing devices, or computer systems or as one or more Network component, network connection device, computer, computing device or computer system (used interchangeably herein unless otherwise indicated). References to "NC 400" collectively refer to any suitable combination of hardware, firmware, and software for implementing the described functions, operations, procedures, or capabilities. For example, NC 400 may refer to a computer that implements a network controller application (also referred to herein as a "program" or "task"). NC 400 includes one or more processors 402 (hereinafter also collectively referred to as "processors 402"). In some embodiments, processor 402 is implemented as a microcontroller or as one or more logic devices, including one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs) or programmable logic devices ( PLD), such as Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD). When implemented in a PLD, the processor can be programmed into the PLD as an intellectual property (IP) block or permanently formed in the PLD as an embedded processor core. Processor 402 may be or include a central processing unit (CPU), such as a single-core or multi-core processor. The processor 402 is coupled to the main memory 404 , the auxiliary memory 406 , the downstream network interface 408 and the upstream network interface 410 . In some embodiments, main memory 404 may be integrated with processor 402, eg, as a system-on-chip (SOC) package, or in embedded memory within the PLD itself. NC 400 may include one or more high-speed memory devices, such as one or more RAM devices. In some embodiments, secondary memory 406 may include one or more solid-state drives (SSDs) that store one or more look-up tables or arrays of values. Auxiliary memory 406 may store a lookup table that maps a first protocol ID (e.g., BACnet ID) received from the MC to a second protocol ID (e.g., CAN ID) each identifying a respective one of the WCs, and vice versa. Of course. In some embodiments, auxiliary memory 406 stores one or more arrays or tables. Downstream network interface 408 enables NC 400 to communicate with distributed WCs and/or various sensors. The upstream network interface 410 enables the NC 400 to communicate with the MC and/or various other computers, servers or databases.

In some embodiments, when the MC decides to color one or more IGUs, the MC writes a specific tint value to the AV in the NC associated with one or more respective WCs of the control-target IGUs. For example, the MC may generate a key tone command communication including the BACnet ID associated with the WC controlling the target IGU. The primary hue command may also include hue values for the target IGU. The MC can direct the transmission of key tone commands to the NC using a network address such as an IP address or a MAC address. In response to receiving this key tone command from the MC via the upstream interface, the NC may initiate communication to map the BACnet ID (or other first protocol ID) in the key tone command to one or more CAN IDs (or other second protocol ID ), and write the hue value from the master hue command to the first of the respective AVs associated with each of the CAN IDs.

In some embodiments, the NC then generates sub-hue commands for each of the WCs identified by CAN ID. Each sub-hue command is addressable to a respective one of the WCs by means of a respective CAN ID. For example, each auxiliary hue command may also include hue values extracted from the primary hue command. The NC may transmit the auxiliary hue command to the target WC through a downstream interface via a second communication protocol (eg, via the CANOpen protocol). In some embodiments, when the WC receives this sub-hue command, the WC transmits a status value indicating the status of the WC back to the NC. For example, a tint state value may represent a "shaded state" or "transition state" indicating that the WC is in the process of tinting the target IGU, a "valid" or "complete" state indicating that the target IGU is in the target tint state or that the transition has ended, or indicating The "error state" of the error. After the state values have been stored in the NC, the NC may publish or otherwise make the state information accessible to the MC or various other authorized computers or applications. In some embodiments, the MC requests status information from the NC for a particular WC based at least in part on intelligence, scheduling policy, or user modification. For example, intelligence can be within the MC or within the BMS. Scheduling policies can be stored in the MC, another storage location within the network system, or in a cloud-based system.

In some embodiments, the NC handles some of the functions, procedures or operations described above as the responsibility of the MC. In some embodiments, the NC may include additional functionality or capabilities not described with reference to the MC. For example, the NC may also include a data logging module (or "data logger") for recording data associated with an IGU controlled by the NC. In some embodiments, the data logger records status information included in each of some or all of the responses to the status request. For example, the status information communicated by the WC to the NC in response to each status request may include the hue status value (S) of the IGU, a value indicating a particular stage on the tinting transition (e.g., a particular stage of a voltage control curve), indicating whether the WC is in A value in sleep mode, a tone value (C), a setpoint voltage set by the WC based at least in part on the tone value (e.g., the value of the effective applied voltage V _Eff ), across an ECD measurement within the IGU, detection, or The actual voltage level V _Act determined by other means, the actual current level I _Act determined by ECD measurement, detection, or other means in the IGU, and various sensor data, for example, collected from integrated on the IGU or internal light sensor or temperature sensor. NC 500 can collect status information and put it into a communication queue such as RabbitMC, ActiveMQ or Kafka, and stream the status information to MC for subsequent processing such as data reduction/compression, event detection, etc., as shown in this article described further in.

In some embodiments, a data logger within the NC collects and stores various information received from the WC in the form of log files such as comma-separated value (CSV) files or via another table structured file format. For example, each column of the CSV file may be associated with a respective status request, and may include values for C, S, V _Eff , V _Act , and I _Act , as well as sensor data (or other data) received in response to the status request. ). In some implementations, each column is identified by a timestamp corresponding to a respective status request (e.g., when the status request was sent by the NC, when the data was collected by the WC, when a response including the data was transmitted by the WC, or when the response was received by the NC ). In some embodiments, each column also includes a CAN ID or other ID associated with a respective WC.

In some embodiments, each column of the CSV file includes requested data for all WCs controlled by the NC. The NC may sequentially cycle through all WCs it controls during each round of status requests. In some embodiments, each column of the CSV file is identified by a timestamp (eg, in the first row), although the timestamp may be associated with the beginning of each round of status requests rather than each individual request. In one specific example, rows 2 to 6 may include the values C, S, V _Eff , V _Act , and I _Act of the first of the WCs controlled by the NC, respectively, and rows 7 to 11 may include the second of the WCs, respectively. The values C, S, V _Eff , V _Act , and I _Act , rows 12 to 16 may include the third party values C, S, V _Eff , V _Act , and I _Act of WC respectively, and for those controlled by the NC The fourth to all of WC and so on. Subsequent rows in the CSV file may contain individual values for the next round of status requests. In some embodiments, each column also includes sensor data obtained from light sensors, temperature sensors, or other sensors integrated with the respective IGUs controlled by each WC. For example, such sensor data values can be entered into C of the first of the WCs between the values of C, S, V _Eff , V _Act , and I _Act but the next WC in the column. , S, V _Eff , V _Act , and I _Act on separate lines preceding the values. Each column may include sensor data values from, for example, one or more external sensors positioned on one or more facades of the building or on the roof. The NC can send status requests to external sensors at the end of each round of status requests.

In some embodiments, the NC translates between various upstream and downstream protocols, eg, to enable distribution of information between the WC and the MC or between the WC and the outward facing network. For example, the NC may include a protocol conversion module responsible for such translation or conversion services. A protocol conversion module can be programmed to perform translation between any of a number of upstream protocols and any of a number of downstream protocols. For example, such upstream protocols may include UDP protocols such as BACnet, TCP protocols such as oBix, other protocols built over these protocols, and various wireless protocols. Downstream protocols may include, for example, CANopen, other CAN-compatible protocols, and various wireless protocols, including, for example, protocols based at least in part on the IEEE 802.11 standard (e.g., WiFi), protocols based at least in part on the IEEE 802.15.4 standard (for example, ZigBee, 6LoWPAN, ISA100.11a, WirelessHART, or MiWi), protocols based at least in part on Bluetooth standards (including Bluetooth Classic, Bluetooth High Speed, and Bluetooth Low Energy protocols, and including Bluetooth v4.0, v4.1 , and v4.2), or at least partially based on the EnOcean standard protocol (ISO/IEC 14543-3-10).

In some embodiments, the NC periodically (eg, every 24 hours) uploads the information recorded by the data logger (eg, as a CSV file) to the MC. For example, the NC may transfer the CSV file to the MC via the Ethernet data link 316 via File Transfer Protocol (FTP) or another suitable protocol. State information can be stored in a database or accessed by the application over an outward facing network.

In some embodiments, the NC includes functionality to analyze information recorded by the data logger. For example, an analysis module may be provided in the NC to receive and/or analyze (eg, in real time) the raw information recorded by the data logger. Real time can include up to 15 seconds (sec.), 30 sec., 45 sec., 1 minute (min), 2 min., 3 min., 4 min., 5 min., 10 min. min., 15 min. or 30 min. In some embodiments, the analysis module is programmed to make decisions based at least in part on raw information from the data logger. In some embodiments, the analysis module communicates with the database to analyze the status information recorded by the data logger after it is stored in the database. For example, an analysis module may compare raw values of electrical characteristics (such as V _Eff , V _Act , and I _Act ) to expected values or expected ranges of values, and flag special conditions based at least in part on the comparison. For example, such flagged conditions may include power spikes indicating faults such as ECD shorts, errors, or damage. The analysis module can communicate this data to the color tone judgment module or power management module in NC.

In some embodiments, the analysis module filters the raw data received from the data logger to more intelligently or efficiently store the information in the database. For example, an analysis module may be programmed to pass only "interesting" information to the database manager for storage in the database. For example, information of interest may include outliers, values that otherwise deviate from expected values (such as based at least in part on empirical or historical values), or values for specific periods in which transitions occur. Examples of data manipulation (e.g., filtering, parsing, temporary storage, and efficient long-term storage in a database) can be found in International Patent Application No. No. PCT/US15/29675, Attorney Docket No. VIEWP049X1WO, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

In some embodiments, a database manager module (or "database manager") in the control system (e.g., in the NC) is configured to periodically (e.g., at least every hour, every few hours, or every 24 hours) will save the information recorded by the data logger to the database. The database may be an external database such as the database described above. In some embodiments, the repository may be internal to the controller (eg, NC). For example, the database may be implemented as a time-series database, such as a Graphite database within secondary memory of the controller (eg, NC) or within another long-term memory within the controller (eg, NC). For example, the database manager may be implemented as a Graphite daemon helper program executing as a background handler, task, subtask, or application within a multitasking operating system of a controller (eg, NC). Time-series databases may be preferred over relational databases such as SQL because time-series databases are more efficient for analyzing data over time.

In some embodiments, databases may collectively refer to two or more databases, each of which may store some or all of the information obtained by some or all of the NCs in the network system. For example, it may be desirable to store copies of information in multiple databases for redundancy purposes. A database may collectively refer to multiple databases, each internal to a respective controller (eg, NC), such as Graphite or other time-series databases. It may be beneficial to store copies of information in multiple databases so that requests for information from applications, including third-party applications, can be distributed among the databases and processed more efficiently. For example, the database may be synchronized periodically or otherwise, eg, to maintain consistency.

In some embodiments, the database manager filters data received from the analysis module to more intelligently and/or efficiently store information, eg, within and/or external to the database. For example, the database manager may be programmed to (eg, only) store "interesting" information to the database. Information of interest may include outliers, values that otherwise deviate from expected values (such as based at least in part on empirical or historical values), and/or values for specific periods in which transitions occurred. A more detailed example of how data can be manipulated (eg, how raw data can be filtered, parsed, temporarily stored, and efficiently long-term stored in a database) can be found in the invention filed on May 7, 2015 entitled "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS ", International Patent Application No. PCT/US15/29675 (Attorney Docket No. VIEWP049X1WO), the entirety of which is hereby incorporated herein by reference.

In some embodiments, the target state determination module is included in a controller (eg, NC, MC, or WC), for example, to calculate, determine, select, or otherwise generate a target state value. For example, a hue determination module may be included in a controller (eg, NC, MC, or WC) for calculating, determining, selecting, or otherwise generating the hue value of the IGU. For example, a state (eg, hue) determination module may execute various algorithms, tasks, or subtasks to generate a hue value based at least in part on a combination of parameters. The combination of parameters may include, for example, status information collected and stored by a data logger. The combination of parameters may also include time or calendar information, such as time of day, day of year, or time of season. The combination of parameters may include Gregorian information such as the direction of the sun relative to the target (eg, IGU). Combinations of parameters may include one or more characteristics of the enclosure environment, including gaseous concentration (e.g., VOC, humidity, carbon dioxide, or oxygen), debris, gas type, gas flow rate, gas flow direction, gas (e.g., atmospheric) temperature , noise level or light level (eg brightness). The combination of parameters may include external parameters (e.g., temperature) outside the enclosure (e.g., a building), internal parameters (e.g., temperature) within the enclosure (e.g., a room adjacent to the target IGU), and/or in The temperature within the internal volume of the IGU. The combination of parameters may include information about the weather (eg, whether the weather is clear, sunny, cloudy, cloudy, raining, or snowing). Parameters such as time of day, day of year, and/or direction of the sun can be programmed into and tracked by a control system (eg, including the NC). For example, parameters such as outside temperature, inside temperature, and/or IGU temperature may be obtained from sensors in, on, or around the building or sensors integrated on or within the IGU. In some embodiments, various parameters are provided by, or determined at least in part based on, information provided by various applications, including third-party applications that can communicate with the controller(s) (e.g., NC) via an API . For example, the network controller application or the operating system in which it runs can be programmed to provide the API.

In some embodiments, the object state (e.g., hue) determination module determines an object's state based at least in part on user modifications received, e.g., via various mobile circuit (e.g., device) applications, wall devices, and/or other devices (for example, hue) value. In some embodiments, the state (e.g., hue) determination module determines the state (e.g., based at least in part on commands or instructions received by various applications (e.g., , hue) value. For example, such third-party applications may include various monitoring services, including thermostat services, alarm services (eg, fire detection), security services, and/or other appliance automation services. Additional examples of monitoring services and systems can be found in International Patent Application No. PCT/US15/19031, filed March 5, 2015, entitled "MONITORING SITES CONTAINING SWITCHABLE OPTICAL DEVICES AND CONTROLLERS" (Attorney Docket No. VIEWP061WO ), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Such applications may communicate with a status (eg, hue) determination module and/or other modules within a controller (eg, NC) via one or more APIs. Some examples of APIs that can be enabled by a controller(s) (eg, NC) are described in International Patent Application No. PCT/US15/64555 entitled "MULTIPLE INTERFACING SYSTEMS AT A SITE" filed 8 December 2015 No. (Attorney Docket No. VIEWP073WO), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In some embodiments, the analysis module compares the values of V _Eff , V _Act , and I _Act and sensor data obtained immediately and/or previously stored in a database with expected values or expected ranges of values, and at least Special conditions are flagged based in part on comparisons. For example, the analysis module may pass this tagged data, tagged conditions, or related information to the power management module. For example, such flagged conditions may include power spikes indicating a smart window (eg, ECD) short circuit, error, or damage. In some embodiments, the power management module modifies operation based at least in part on tagged data or conditions. For example, the power management module can delay status (e.g., tint) commands of the target until power demand drops, stopping commands to the controller in question (e.g., a local controller such as a WC) (and leaving it in an idle state) , initiate interleaved commands to controllers (eg, such as lower level controllers of the WC), manage peak power and/or issue a distress signal.

FIG. 5 shows an example network controller (NC) 500 including a plurality of modules. NC 500 is coupled to MC 502 and database 504 via interface 510 and to WC 506 via interface 508 . In this example, the internal modules of NC 500 include data recorder 512, protocol conversion module 514, analysis module 516, database manager 518, hue determination module 520, power management module 522 and commissioning module 524.

In some embodiments, a controller (eg, WC) or other network device includes a sensor or sensor collective. For example, a plurality of sensors or a collection of sensors may be organized into a sensor module. A sensor collective may comprise a circuit board, such as a printed circuit board, for example, where several sensors are adhered or attached to the circuit board. The sensor(s) are removable (eg, reversibly removable) from the sensor module. For example, sensors may be plugged into and/or unplugged from the circuit board. Sensors may be individually activated and/or deactivated (eg, using switches). The circuit board may contain polymers. The circuit board can be transparent or opaque. Circuit boards may include metals such as elemental metals and/or metal alloys. The circuit board may contain conductors. The circuit board may contain insulators. Boards can contain any geometric shape (such as rectangles or ellipses). The circuit board may be configured (eg, may have a shape) to allow the collective to be seated in a frame portion such as a mullion (eg, of a window). The circuit board can be configured (eg, can have a shape) to allow the set to be seated in a frame (eg, a door frame and/or window frame). The frame may contain one or more holes, eg, to allow the sensor to take (eg, accurate) readings. The circuit board can be enclosed in a wrapper. The wrap may contain flexible or rigid sections. The wrap may be flexible. The wrap may be rigid (eg, comprising a hardened polymer, glass, or metal (eg, comprising elemental metal or metal alloy)). The wrap may comprise composite materials. The wrap may comprise carbon fibres, glass fibres, and/or polymeric fibres. The wrap may have one or more holes, eg, to allow the sensor to take (eg, accurate) readings. The circuit board may include electrical connectivity ports (eg, sockets). The circuit board may be connected to a power source (eg, electricity). Power sources may include renewable and/or non-renewable power sources.

FIG. 6 shows a diagram 600 with an example of a sensor collective organized into a sensor module. Sensors 610A, 610B, 610C, and 610D are shown as included in sensor collective 605 . A sensor set organized as a sensor module may include at least 1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 10, 20, 50, or 500 sensors. A sensor module may include a number of sensors within a range between any of the foregoing values (eg, about 1 to about 1000, about 1 to about 500, or about 500 to about 1000). The sensors of the sensor module may include sensors configured and/or designed to sense parameters including: temperature, humidity, carbon dioxide, particulate matter (e.g., between 2.5 µm and 10 µm time), TVOC (e.g., via voltage potential change caused by surface adsorption of VOCs), ambient light, audio noise level, pressure (e.g., gas and/or liquid), acceleration, time , radar, lidar, radio signals (for example, UWB radio signals), passive infrared, glass breakage or motion detectors. A sensor collective (eg, 605 ) may include non-sensor devices such as buzzers and light emitting diodes. Examples of sensor collectives and their uses can be found in U.S. Patent Application No. 16/447,169, entitled "SENSING AND COMMUNICATIONS UNIT FOR OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE WINDOW SYSTEMS," filed June 20, 2019, the entirety of which is incorporated by reference way incorporated into this article.

In some embodiments, an increase in the number and/or type of sensors may be used to increase the chance that one or more measured characteristics are accurate and/or that a particular event measured by one or more sensors has occurred probability. In some embodiments, sensors in a sensor collective may cooperate with each other. In one example, a sensor-focused radar sensor can determine that there are several individuals within the enclosure. A processor (eg, processor 615) may determine that detection of the presence of a number of individuals in an enclosure is positively correlated with an increase in carbon dioxide concentration. In one example, the processor-accessible memory can determine that an increase in detected infrared energy is positively correlated with an increase in temperature as detected by the temperature sensor. In some embodiments, a network interface (eg, 650 ) can communicate with other sensor collectives similar to the sensor collective. A web interface can additionally communicate with the controller.

Individual sensors of a sensor set (eg, sensor 610A, sensor 610D, etc.) may include and/or utilize at least one dedicated processor. The sensor collective may utilize its remote processor (eg, 654 ) utilizing wireless and/or wired communication links. The sensor collective may utilize at least one processor (eg, processor 652 ), which may represent a cloud-based processor coupled to the sensor collective via the cloud (eg, 650 ). Processors (e.g., 652 and/or 654) may be located in the same building, in different buildings, in buildings owned by the same or different entities, in facilities owned by the manufacturer of the window/controller/sensor collective , or in any other location. In various embodiments, the sensor collective 605 need not include separate processors and network interfaces, as indicated by the dashed lines in FIG. 6 . These entities may be separate entities and operably coupled to collective 605 . Dashed lines in Figure 6 indicate optional features. In some embodiments, the on-board processing and/or memory of one or more sensor sets may be used to support other functions (e.g., by allocating the set memory and/or processing power to the building's network infrastructure) .

In some embodiments, sensor data is exchanged among various network devices and controllers. Remote users (eg, inside or outside the same building) can also access sensor data for retrieval, eg, using a personal electronic device. An application executing on the remote device to access sensor data may also provide commands for controllable functions, such as tint commands for window controllers. Example window controller(s) described in International Patent Application No. PCT/US16/58872, filed October 26, 2016, entitled "CONTROLLERS FOR OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE DEVICES", and filed October 26, 2016 US Patent Application No. 15/334,832, entitled "CONTROLLERS FOR OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE DEVICES," is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

In some embodiments, a controller (eg, NC) periodically requests status information from lower-level controllers (eg, from its controlled WC). For example, a controller (e.g., NC) may communicate a status request to a lower-level controller (e.g., its controlling at least one (eg, each) of WC). In some embodiments, at least one (eg, each) status request is directed to each of the lower-level controllers (eg, WCs) using the CAN ID or other identifier of the respective lower-level controller (eg, WC). the other. In some embodiments, a controller (eg, NC) advances sequentially through all lower-level controllers (eg, WCs) it controls during at least one round (eg, each round) of state acquisition. A controller (e.g., NC) may cycle through at least two (e.g., all) of the lower-level controllers (e.g., WC) it controls, such that status requests are sequentially sent to these lower-level controllers in the round of status acquisition Controller (for example, WC). After a status request has been sent to a given lower-level controller (eg, WC), an upper-hierarchical-level controller (eg, NC) may, for example, send a request to one of the lower-level controllers (eg, WC) in that round of status acquisition. Waits to receive status information from a lower-level controller (eg, WC) before sending a status request next.

In some embodiments, after having received status information from all lower-level controllers (eg, WCs) controlled by an upper-level controller (eg, NC), the upper-level controller (eg, NC) executes to a target (eg, , to the IGU) for a round of state-changing (eg, hue) command distribution. For example, in some implementations, at least one round (eg, each round) of state acquisition is followed by a round of hue command distribution, followed by the next round of state acquisition followed by the next round of hue command distribution, and so on. In some embodiments, during a round of state (e.g., hue) command distribution to a target's controller, the controller (e.g., NC) continues to send hue commands to lower-level controllers (e.g., NC) controlled Stratum controller (for example, WC). In some embodiments, a hierarchy controller (eg, NC) sequentially advances through all lower hierarchy controllers it controls (eg, WC) during the round of tint command distribution. In other words, a higher-level (eg, NC) controller cycles through (eg, all) lower-level controllers (eg, WCs) it controls such that the state ( eg, hue) commands are sent to lower-level controllers (eg, WCs) (eg, each of them) to change the state of an object (eg, change the hue state of an IGU).

In some embodiments, the status request includes one or more instructions indicating what status information to request from a respective lower-level controller (eg, a local controller such as a WC). In some embodiments, in response to receiving this request, the respective lower-level controller (e.g., WC) transmits the requested status information to a higher-level controller (e.g., NC) (e.g., via an upstream cable set China's communication line) to respond. In some other embodiments, each status request presupposes causing a lower-level controller (eg, WC) to transmit a predefined set of information for a set of targets (eg, IGUs, sensors, emitters, or media) it controls. Status information communicated by a lower-level controller (eg, WC) to an upper-level controller (eg, NC) in response to a status request may include a (eg, hue) status value (S) of a target (eg, IGU). For example, an indication of whether the target (eg, IGU) is undergoing a state change (eg, shading transition) or has completed a state change (eg, shading transition or light intensity change). The hue state value S or another value may indicate a particular stage in the tinting transition (eg, a particular stage of a voltage control profile). In some embodiments, the status value S or another value indicates whether the lower level controller (eg, WC) is in sleep mode. The status information communicated in response to a status request may also include the status (eg, hue) value (C) of the target (eg, IGU), eg, as set by the controller (eg, MC or NC). The response may also include a setpoint voltage (eg, the value of effectively applied V _Eff ) set by a lower-level controller (eg, WC) based at least in part on a state (eg, hue) value. In some embodiments, the response includes measuring, detecting, or otherwise determining the near-instantaneous actual voltage level V _Act across the ECD within the IGU (eg, via amplifiers and feedback circuits). In some embodiments, the response includes a near-instantaneous actual current level I _Act measured, detected, or otherwise determined by the ECD within the IGU (eg, via amplifiers and feedback circuits). Responses may also include various near real-time sensor data collected, for example, from light sensors or temperature sensors integrated on or within the IGU.

The window controllers described herein are also suitable for integration with or within/part of a Building Management System (BMS). A BMS is a computer-based control system installed in a building, which monitors and controls the mechanical and electrical equipment of the building, such as ventilation, lighting, electrical systems, elevators, fire protection systems and security systems. A BMS may include hardware, including interconnection via communication channels to computer(s), and associated software for maintaining conditions in a building according to preferences set by occupants and/or by building managers. For example, a BMS can be implemented using a local area network such as Ethernet. Software may be based on Internet Protocol and/or open standards, for example. One example is software from Tridium Corporation (Richmond, Virginia). One communication protocol commonly used by BMSs is BACnet (Building Automation and Control Network).

BMSs are most commonly found in large buildings, and typically at least function to control the environment within the building. For example, a BMS can control the temperature, carbon dioxide level and humidity inside a building. Typically, there are numerous mechanical devices controlled by the BMS, such as heaters, air conditioners, blowers, vents, and the like. To control the building environment, the BMS can switch these various devices on and off under defined conditions. A core function of a typical modern BMS is to maintain a comfortable environment for the building's occupants while minimizing heating and cooling costs/demand. Therefore, modern BMSs are not only used for monitoring and control, but also for optimizing the synergy between various systems, for example to save energy and reduce building operating costs.

In some embodiments, a window controller is integrated with the BMS, where the window controller is configured to control one or more electrochromic windows or other tintable windows. In other embodiments, the window controller is within or part of the BMS and the BMS controls both the functions of the tintable windows and other systems of the building. In one example, the BMS can control the functions of all building systems including one or more partitions of tintable windows in the building.

In some embodiments, each tintable window of the one or more partitions includes at least one solid state and inorganic electrochromic device. In one embodiment, each of the one or more partitioned tintable windows is an electrochromic window having one or more solid state and inorganic electrochromic devices. In one embodiment, the one or more tintable windows comprise at least one all-solid-state and inorganic electrochromic device, but may comprise more than one electrochromic device, for example where each sheet or pane of the IGU is tintable . In one embodiment, the electrochromic window is a multi-state electrochromic window as described in US Patent Application Serial No. 12/851,514, filed August 5, 2010, entitled "MULTIPANE ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS." 7 depicts a schematic diagram of an example of a building 701 and a BMS 705 that manages several building systems, including security systems, heating/ventilating/air conditioning (HVAC), building lighting, electrical systems, elevators, fire protection systems, and its ilk. Security systems may include magnetic card access, turnstiles, solenoid actuated door locks, surveillance cameras, burglar alarms, metal detectors, and the like. Fire protection systems may include fire alarm and suppression systems, including water mains controls. The lighting system may include interior lighting, exterior lighting, emergency warning lights, emergency exit signs and emergency floor exit lighting. The power system may include primary generators, backup generators, and an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) grid.

Also, the BMS 705 manages the window control system 702 . Window control system 702 is a distributed network of window controllers including master controller 703 , network controllers 707 a and 707 b , and terminal or leaf controller 708 . End or leaf controller 708 may be similar to window controller 104 described with respect to FIG. 1 . For example, the master controller 703 may be near the BMS 705, and each floor of the building 701 may have one or more network controllers 707a and 707b, while each window of the building has its own terminal controller 708. In this example, each of controllers 708 controls specific electrochromic windows of building 701 . The window control system 702 communicates with the cloud network 710 to receive data. For example, window control system 702 may receive scheduling information from a clear sky model maintained on cloud network 710 . Although main controller 703 is depicted in FIG. 7 as being separate from BMS 705 , in another embodiment, main controller 703 is part of or within BMS 705 . Each of the controllers 708 may be in a separate location from the electrochromic window it controls, or be integrated into the electrochromic window. For simplicity, only the ten electrochromic windows of building 701 are depicted as being controlled by master window controller 702 . In a typical setup, there may be a large number of electrochromic windows controlled by window control system 702 in a building. Advantages and features of incorporating an electrochromic window controller as described herein with a BMS are described in more detail below and with respect to FIG. 7 where appropriate. The building 701 is depicted against a gravity vector 750 pointing toward the center of gravity.

One aspect of the disclosed embodiments is a BMS comprising a multipurpose electrochromic window controller as described herein. By incorporating feedback from an electrochromic window controller, a BMS can provide, for example, enhanced: 1) environmental control, 2) energy savings, 3) safety, 4) flexibility in control options, 5) others Improved reliability and service life of the system due to less dependence on it and thus its less maintenance, 6) information availability and diagnostics, 7) efficient use of workers and higher productivity from workers and Various combinations of these, because the electrochromic window can be controlled automatically. In some embodiments, the BMS may not be present or the BMS may be present but may not communicate with the master controller or communicate with the master controller at a high level. In certain embodiments, maintenance on the BMS will not interrupt control of the electrochromic window.

In some cases, the BMS 605 or a system associated with the building network may operate according to a daily, monthly, quarterly or yearly schedule. For example, lighting control systems, window control systems, HVAC, and security systems may operate on a 24-hour schedule that takes into account when people are in the building during the workday. At night, the building can enter an energy saving mode, and during the day, the system can operate in a manner that minimizes the building's energy consumption while providing occupant comfort. As another example, the system may be powered off or put into a power saving mode during holiday periods.

BMS scheduling can be combined with geographic information. Geographical information may include latitude and longitude of buildings. Geographical information may also include information about the direction each side of the building is facing. Different rooms on different sides of the building can be controlled in different ways using such information. For example, in winter, for an east-facing room of a building, the window controller may instruct the window to have no tint in the morning, making the room warmer due to sunlight shining in the room, and because of the illumination from the daylight, lighting the control panel The light can be dimmed. West facing windows can be controlled by the occupant of the room in the morning, since the tint of windows on the west side may not affect energy savings. However, the mode of operation of the east-facing windows and the west-facing windows can be switched at night (for example, when the sun goes down, the west-facing windows are untinted to allow sunlight in to bring in heat and light).

The following describes an example of a building (e.g., like building 701 in FIG. 7 ) that includes a building network or BMS, tintable windows for the exterior windows separate from the exterior of the building), and several different sensors. Light from an exterior window of a building typically has an effect on interior lighting in a building about 20 feet or about 30 feet from the window. That is, spaces in the building that are greater than about 20 feet or about 30 feet from the exterior windows receive very little light from the exterior windows. These spaces in the building away from the exterior windows are illuminated by the building's lighting system.

Additionally, the temperature within a building can be affected by external light and/or external temperature. For example, in cold weather and where the building is heated by a heating system, rooms closer to doors and/or windows will lose heat faster than, and be cooler than, interior areas of the building.

For exterior sensors, a building may include exterior sensors on the roof of the building. Alternatively, the building may include an exterior sensor associated with each exterior window or an exterior sensor on each side of the building. Exterior sensors on each side of the building can track the irradiance on one side of the building as the sun changes position during the day.

In some embodiments, the received output signals include signals indicative of energy or power consumption of heating systems, cooling systems, and/or lighting devices within the building. For example, the energy or power consumption of a building's heating system, cooling system, and/or lighting can be monitored to provide a signal indicative of energy or power consumption. The device may interface with or be connected to the electrical circuits and/or wiring of the building to enable this monitoring. Alternatively, the electrical system in the building may be installed so that the electricity consumed by the heating system, cooling system and/or lighting for an individual room in the building or a group of rooms in the building can be monitored.

Tint commands may be provided to change the tint of the tintable window to a determined tint level. For example, referring to FIG. 7, this may include a main controller 703 issuing commands to one or more network controllers 707a and 707b, which in turn send commands to terminal controllers controlling the windows of the building. 708 issues an order. Terminal controller 708 may apply voltage and/or current to the windows to drive tint changes on command.

In some embodiments, a building including an electrochromic window and a BMS may participate or participate in a demand response program operated by providing power to one or more facilities of the building. The program may be a program that reduces the energy consumption of the building in anticipation of peak loads. Utilities can issue warning signals in advance of expected peak loads. For example, a warning can be issued a day, in the morning or approximately an hour before an expected peak load. Peak loads can be expected on hot summer days, for example when the cooling system/air conditioner draws a lot of power from the utility. The warning signal can be received by the BMS of the building or by a window controller configured to control electrochromic windows in the building. This warning signal can be an override mechanism that decouples the window controller from the system. The BMS may then instruct the window controller(s) to transition the appropriate electrochromic devices in the electrochromic window to a dark tint level that assists in reducing power draw by the cooling system in the building when peak load is expected.

In some embodiments, tintable windows for exterior windows of a building (i.e., windows that separate the interior of the building from the exterior of the building) may be grouped into partitions, wherein the tintable windows in the partitions are indicated in a similar manner. window. For example, groups of electrochromic windows on different floors of a building or on different sides of a building can be in different zones. For example, on the first floor of a building, all east-facing electrochromic windows could be in zone 1, all south-facing electrochromic windows could be in zone 2, and all west-facing electrochromic windows could be in zone 1. In zone 3, and all electrochromic windows facing north can be in zone 4. As another example, all electrochromic windows on the first floor of a building may be in zone 1, all electrochromic windows on the second floor may be in zone 2, and all electrochromic windows on the third floor Windows are available in Zoning 3. As yet another example, all electrochromic windows facing east could be in zone 1, all electrochromic windows facing south could be in zone 2, all electrochromic windows facing west could be in zone 3, and all electrochromic windows facing North electrochromic windows are available in zone 4. As yet another example, east-facing electrochromic windows on one floor may be divided into different zones. Any number of tintable windows on the same side and/or different sides and/or different floors of a building can be assigned to a zone. In embodiments where individual tintable windows have independently controllable zones, combinations of zones of individual windows may be used to form tinted zones on a building facade, for example where individual windows may or may not have all zones tinted.

In some embodiments, electrochromic windows in a zone may be controlled by the same window controller or set of same window controllers. In some other embodiments, the electrochromic windows in a zone may be controlled by different window controllers.

In some embodiments, the electrochromic windows in a zone may be controlled by one or more window controllers that receive output signals from the transmittance sensors. In some embodiments, a transmittance sensor may be mounted proximate to a window in a partition. For example, the transmittance sensors may be mounted in or on a frame containing the IGUs contained in the partitions (eg, mounted in or on mullions, horizontal window frames of the frame). In some other embodiments, electrochromic windows in a zone that includes windows on a single side of a building may be controlled by one or more window controllers that receive output signals from a transmittance sensor.

In some embodiments, a building manager, occupants of rooms in the second zone, or others may manually indicate (e.g., using tint or transparency commands or commands from a user console of the BMS) that the second zone ( That is, the electrochromic window in the slave control region) enters a tint level, such as a tinted state (level) or a clear state. In some embodiments, when using this manual command to override the tint level of the windows in the second partition, the electrochromic windows in the first partition (i.e., the master zone) remain at the level received from the transmittance sensor. to the control of the output. The second partition can remain in manual command mode for a period of time and then revert back to being under control of the output from the transmittance sensor. For example, the second partition may remain in manual mode for an hour after receiving the overwrite command, and then may revert back to being under control of the output from the transmittance sensor.

In some embodiments, a building manager, occupants of rooms in the second zone, or others may manually instruct (using hue commands or commands from a user console such as a BMS) that the first zone (i.e., window in the Master Control) enters a tint level, such as a tinted state or a clear state. In some embodiments, when such a manual command is used to override the tint level of the windows in the first zone, the electrochromic windows in the second zone (i.e., the slave control zone) remain at the level from the external sensor. under the control of the output. The first partition may remain in manual command mode for a period of time and then revert back to being under control of the output from the transmittance sensor. For example, after receiving an override command, the first partition may remain in manual mode for an hour, and then may revert back to being under control of the output from the transmittance sensor. In some other embodiments, the electrochromic window in the second partition may remain at the tint level it was at when it received the manual override for the first partition. The first partition can remain in manual command mode for a period of time and then both the first partition and the second partition can return to be under control of the output from the transmittance sensor.

Regardless of whether the window controller is a stand-alone window controller or interfaces with the building network, any of the methods described herein for controlling a tintable window can be used to control the tint of the tintable window.

In some embodiments, one or more models of a particular building site are generated. The model(s) may be used to determine tinting levels for specific windows or regions, tinting schedules for specific windows or regions, and/or the like. The model may be based at least in part on weather information, sensor readings (e.g., obtained using one or more sensors, one or more sensors of a sensor collective, etc.), scheduling information, occupancy information, and/or or similar. Such models, sometimes referred to as "prescriptive models," predict target states of controllable devices based on target factors or target considerations. In some embodiments, the system architecture described herein does not require the window control system to actively generate a model of the building. Instead, models specific to building sites can be generated and/or maintained (i) on a cloud network and/or (ii) on other networks separate from the window control system. For example, neural network-like models (e.g., dense neural network (DNN) and/or long short-term memory (LSTM) networks) are initialized, retrained, and/or the control system Real-time models executing on separate other networks and shade scheduling information from these models are provided (eg, deployed or pushed) to window control system 840 .

The tint schedule information defines the rules derived from these models and pushed to the window control system. The window control system uses tinting schedule information derived from a predefined model customized for the building to make the final tinting decisions implemented at the tintable windows. The 3D model is maintained on a cloud-based 3D modeling platform that can generate visual effects of the 3D model to allow user management for building and customizing building sites and applying to tintable windows which corresponds to the input of the final tone state. Once the tint schedule information is loaded into the window control system, it is no longer necessary to model the calculations to tie up the computing power of the control system. The tint schedule information resulting from any changes to the model can be pushed to the window control system as needed. It should be appreciated that although the system architecture is generally described herein with respect to controlling tintable windows, other components and systems at the building may additionally or alternatively be controlled by this architecture.

In various implementations, the system architecture includes cloud-based modules to configure and customize 3D models of building locations. A cloud-based 3D modeling system uses an architectural model as input to initialize a 3D model of a building site, such as an Autodesk ^® Revit model or other industry standard building models. A 3D model in its simplest form includes the exterior surface of the building's structure (including window openings) and a stripped-down version of the building's interior (having only floors and walls). More complex models may include the exterior surfaces of objects surrounding the building as well as more detailed features of the building's interior and exterior. The system architecture also includes a cloud-based clear sky module that assigns reflective or non-reflective properties to external surfaces of objects in the 3D model, defines internal three-dimensional footprints, assigns IDs to windows and based on data from the user The input to groups the windows into partitions. A time-varying simulation of the resulting clear-sky 3D model (i.e., a 3D model with configuration data with assigned attributes) can be used to determine the direction of sunlight at different positions of the sun under clear-sky conditions and to account for shadows from objects at building sites and reflections, daylight entering the spaces of the building and the 3D projection intersection of daylight and the three-dimensional footprint in the building. The clear sky module uses this information to determine whether certain conditions such as glare conditions, direct and indirect reflection conditions, and passive heating conditions exist for a particular occupied area (ie, from the occupant's perspective). The clear sky module determines the clear sky tint status for each partition at each time interval based on the presence of a particular condition at that time, the tint status assigned to that condition, and the priority of the different conditions (if multiple conditions exist). Pushes the tint schedule information, typically for a year, to a master controller such as a window control system at a building. The window control system determines a weather-based tint state for each zone at each time interval based on sensor data, such as measurements from infrared sensors and/or light sensors. Next, the window control system determines to set a final tint state based on the minimum of the weather tint state and the clear air tint state and sends tint commands to implement the final tint state at the zone of tintable windows. Thus, in some embodiments, the window control system does not model the building or the 3D parameters around and inside the building, it is done offline and thus the computing power of the window control system can be used for other tasks, such as based on the window control system. The model and/or other input received by the system to apply the tint state.

8 depicts a diagram of the systems and users involved in initializing and customizing models maintained in cloud network 801 and controlling tintable windows of buildings based on outputs, such as rules from those models, according to various embodiments. A schematic diagram of the general architecture 800 . The system architecture 800 includes a cloud-based 3D modeling system 810 in communication with a cloud-based clear sky module 820 , where the combination of 810 and 820 is referred to as module A. In one embodiment, module A provides input to window control system 840 . 3D modeling system 810 may initialize and/or update a 3D model of a building site and communicate the 3D model data to clear sky module 820 . The 3D model initialized by the 3D modeling system includes the exterior surfaces of the surrounding structures and other objects at the building site and the entire building except the walls, floors and exterior surfaces. The cloud-based clear sky module 820 can assign attributes to the 3D model to generate a clear sky 3D model, such as, for example, one or more of a glare/shadow model, a reflection model, and a passive heating model. Cloud-based systems communicate with each other and with other applications over the cloud network using application programming interfaces (APIs). Both the cloud-based 3D modeling system 810 and the clear sky module 820 include logic as described in more detail herein. It will be appreciated that these cloud-based modules, as well as other modules and other logic described herein, may be stored on a computer-readable medium (e.g., memory) on a server in the cloud network, and that The one or more processors on the server communicate with the computer-readable medium to execute instructions to perform logical functions. In one embodiment, window control system 840 also receives input from module B, which is further described herein. In another embodiment, the window control system 840 receives inputs from modules A, C1 and D1.

The clear sky module 820 can use the 3D model of the building site to generate time-lapse simulations of different positions of the sun under clear sky conditions to determine glare, shadows, and reflections from one or more objects in and around the building site . For example, the clear sky module 820 can generate a clear sky glare/shadow model and a reflection model and using a ray tracing engine can determine direct sunlight through a window opening of a building based on shadows and reflections under clear sky conditions. The clear sky module 820 uses shadow and reflection data to determine the presence of glare, reflection, and passive heating conditions in the occupied area of the building (ie, the likely location of the occupants). The cloud-based clear sky module 820 determines an annual schedule (or other time period) of tint states for each of the building's zones based on these conditions. The cloud-based clear sky module 820 typically pushes the tint schedule information to the window control system 840 .

Window control system 840 includes a network of window controllers. The window control system 840 communicates with zones of tintable windows in the building, which are depicted in FIG. 8 as a series of zones from zone 1 872 to zone n 874 . The window control system 840 determines the final tint state and sends tint commands to control the tint state of the tintable windows. A final tint state is determined based on annual schedule information, sensor data, and/or weather feed data. As described with respect to the illustrated system architecture 800, the window control system 840 does not generate models or otherwise waste computing power on modeling. Models specific to building sites are generated, customized and stored in the cloud network 801 . Initially the predefined tint schedule information is pushed to the window control system, and then likewise only needs to be updated to the 3D model (eg building layout changes, new objects in the surrounding area, or the like).

The system architecture 800 also includes a graphical user interface (GUI) 890 for communicating with customers and other users to provide application services, reports, and visualizations of the 3D model and to receive input for configuring and customizing the 3D model. Visual effects of the 3D model can be provided to and received from the user via the GUI. The depicted user includes site operations 892 involved in site troubleshooting, and has the ability to review visuals and edit 3D models. Users also include Customer Success Managers (CSM) 894 with the ability to review 3D model visuals and live configuration changes. Users also include client configuration entry(s) 898 for communicating with various clients. Through the client configuration portal(s) 898, the client can review various visuals of the data mapped to the 3D model and provide input to change the configuration at the building site. Some examples of input from the user include spatial configuration, such as footprint, 3D object definitions at building locations, tonal status of certain conditions, and priority of conditions. Some examples of output provided to users include visuals of data on 3D models, standard reports, and performance evaluations of buildings. Certain users are depicted for illustrative purposes. It should be understood that other or additional users may be included.

Although many examples of system architectures are described herein in which the 3D modeling system, clear sky modules, and neural network models reside on a cloud network, in another embodiment, one or more of these modules and models may not necessarily require Residing on the cloud network. For example, the 3D modeling system, clear sky module, and or other modules or models described herein may reside on a separate computer or other computing device that is separate from the window control system and separate from the window control system. Control system communication. As another example, the neural network models described herein may reside on a window controller, such as a master window controller or a network window controller.

In certain embodiments, the computing resources used to train and execute the various models (e.g., DNN and LSTM models) and modules of the system architecture described herein include: (1) local resources of the window control system; (2) ) a remote source separate from the window control system; or (3) shared resources. In the first case, the computing resources used to train and execute the various models and modules reside on the master controller or one or more window controllers of the distributed network of window controllers. In the second case, the computing resources used to train and execute the various models and modules reside on remote resources separate from the window control system. For example, computing resources may reside on servers on an external third-party network or on servers that are rentable cloud-based resources, such as may be available through cloud network 801 in FIG. 8 . As another example, the computing resources may reside on a server at a site that is an independent computing device that is separate from and in communication with the window control system. In the third case, the computing resources used to train and execute the various models and modules reside on shared resources (both local and remote). For example, remote resources (such as rentable cloud-based resources available through cloud network 801 in FIG. The primary window controller or group of window controllers) executes the instant model during the day that tint decisions need to be made.

The system architecture described herein includes a window control system comprising a network of window controllers that control the tint levels of one or more partitions of tintable windows at a building. Some examples of controllers that may be included in the window control system 840 of the system architecture are described with respect to FIG. 1 . Other examples of window controllers are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 15/334,835, filed October 26, 2016, entitled "CONTROLLERS FOR OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE DEVICES," which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.

Window control system 840 includes control logic for making tinting decisions and sending tint commands to change tint levels for tintable windows. In some embodiments, the control logic includes a module A having a cloud-based 3D modeling system 810 and a cloud-based clear sky module 820 and a module B described further below, wherein module B receives data from a user with one or more module C with one or more light sensor values and/or the signal from module D with one or more infrared sensor values. Module C may include one or more light sensors that take light sensor readings or may receive data from, for example, residing in a multi-sensor device such as a sky sensor. A signal of raw light sensor readings from one or more light sensors. Module D may include one or more infrared sensors and/or ambient temperature sensor(s) that take temperature readings or may receive data from, for example, multiple A signal of raw temperature measurements from one or more infrared sensors in a sensor arrangement (or sky sensor, eg, Fig. 25, 2507).

FIG. 9 is a depicted example of data flow communicated between some of the systems of the system architecture 800 shown in FIG. 8 . As shown, cloud network 901 (including 910 and 920 ) provides its information to window control system 940 . Window control system 940 controls zones 972 and 974 . In one implementation, the control logic of window control system 940 also receives one or more inputs from module B and sets the final tint state of each zone based on the output received from module A and/or module B. In other embodiments, the control logic of window control system 940 also receives one or more inputs from module C1 and module D1 and sets the final threshold for each zone based on the outputs received from module A, module C1, and module D1. Hue status. Cloud network 901 receives input from GUI 990 which receives input from user 999 .

In some embodiments, the status of one or more devices of a facility is changed from one or more respective current statuses. In some embodiments, a device may include one or more environmental conditioning system components (e.g., HVAC components, lighting system components, etc.), one or more security system components (e.g., audible alarm components, visual alarm components, lock systems etc.), health system components, electrical system components, communication system components (e.g., one or more media displays, one or more speakers, etc.), and/or people conveyance components (e.g., one or more elevator systems), and and/or one or more tintable windows. In some embodiments, the current state of a device may be based at least in part on (i) (eg, explicit) user configuration settings, (ii) scheduling information, and/or (iii) information about one or more devices Machine learning model decisions that guide (a) modeling and/or (b) control. Instructive modeling may be based at least in part on (I) weather information, (II) sensor data, (III) scheduling information, (IV) energy consumption information, or (V) any combination thereof. Examples of guided modeling include Modules A, B, C, and/or D. In some embodiments, the changed state of a device in a facility may be a different state than the determined state. The determination of status may be based at least in part on one or more of (a) an instructional model and/or (b) (eg, explicit) user configuration settings. In some embodiments, the changed state of the device may be an override of the current state of the device. For example, the control system may assign tint level one to a tintable window, and the user prefers tint level two for the tintable window. The user can override the control system's tint level determination (hue one) for that window, and specify or propose tint level two for that window.

In some embodiments, the state of a device of a facility changes based at least in part on one or more machine learning models that take into account user input indicative of preferences regarding the state of the device. In some embodiments, one or more machine learning models may be referred to herein as one or more behavioral models. Behavioral models can operate in relation to, and/or overwrite, a directive model. In some embodiments, the behavioral model may learn user preferences for the state of the device based at least in part on time of day, weather conditions, and/or internal environmental conditions (eg, lighting level, temperature, humidity, etc.). In some embodiments, the behavioral model may predict (at a future time) a particular user's behavior about the device based at least in part on user input (e.g., user feedback) from the user and/or from other user(s) User preference for status. The other user(s) may be in the same facility as the user and/or in other facilities. In some embodiments, other facilities are identified as similar with respect to at least one facility characteristic for which a state of the device may be changed. At least one facility characteristic may include building type and/or room type. At least one facility characteristic regarding room type may include consideration of (i) whether the room with which the device is associated is a shared space or a single room, and/or (II) the intended use of the room with which the device is associated. At least one facility characteristic related to a building type may be related to: building shape, building size, building height, building use, geographic location, and/or geographic facing direction of a building's façade. In some embodiments, user(s) similar to the user may be identified. Similar user(s) may be similar with respect to at least one user characteristic. The at least one user characteristic may include (i) a user role within an organization, (ii) user demographic information, and/or (iii) implicitly learned user preferences. User preferences may include warmer or cooler preferences (e.g., temperature preferences), brighter or darker room preferences (e.g., lux level preferences), more or less glare control preferences, (iv) Color palette preference, (v) gas (e.g., humidity) level preference, (vi) noise level preference, (vii) noise (e.g., music) type preference, and/or (viii) ) Preferences regarding machine settings (eg, printer settings, beverage dispenser settings, computer settings, and/or screen settings). A machine may comprise a service machine, a personal machine (eg, a personal computer), or a production (eg, factory) machine.

In some embodiments, a machine learning model (eg, a behavioral model) determines an action based at least in part on a user input indicative of a preference for a state of a device in a facility. Actions may include different states that the device (a) changes to and/or (b) adjusts to. In some embodiments, an action may include suggesting and/or proposing to transition the device into a different state. In some embodiments, suggestions and/or offers may be presented to (A) the user providing the user input and/or (B) a different user (eg, a facility operations manager and/or other managers). User input of preferences related to the state of the device can be associated with a set of conditions. The set of conditions may include timing information (e.g., indicating the time at which user input was received), weather information, and/or sensor data (e.g., from one or more light sensors, from one or more temperature sensors sensor, from one or more occupancy sensors, from one or more motion sensors, from one or more humidity sensors, from one or more gas flow sensors, from one or more VOC sensor, or similar). Sensor data may be received from sensors collectively of devices enclosed in the housing.

In some embodiments, actions are identified by a machine learning model (eg, behavioral model) at least in part by identifying rule-based patterns (eg, heuristics). A rule-based pattern may be associated with a set of conditions that match the set of conditions under which user input regarding the current state of the device is received. For example, a rule-based pattern could be: <{Conditions}; Device1 = State X >, where {Conditions} indicates the set of conditions, and "State X " indicates the action to take with respect to Device1 (eg, the target state of Device1). Examples of target states may include the tint state of a tintable window, the air flow state of an air vent of an HVAC system, the light level of a lighting system component, or the like. An example of a rule-based pattern is: <{Photosensor value= X ; Time of day=”morning;” window direction=”east;”}; Window1=”Tint Level 4”>. In some embodiments, rule-based The pattern for is identified using a set of conditions that match the set of conditions under which the user input is received and/or are similar with respect to the set of conditions. Similarity of a set of conditions may be determined based at least in part on a threshold number of conditions within the set of conditions that are within a distance (eg, Euclidean distance) or range from each other.

In some embodiments, a rule-based pattern for a particular set of conditions is determined based at least in part on user input from one or more users. A rule-based pattern may be established based at least in part on receiving more than one threshold. Thresholds may be indicated by the number of user inputs (e.g., more than one, more than five, more than ten, more than fifteen, more than less than fifty, more than one hundred, etc.). Threshold connectable function. User input indicative of a preference for devices that differ from each other in at least one device characteristic may be received. User input indicative of a preference for devices that are similar to each other in at least one device characteristic may be received. For example, the devices may be of the same type (eg, a tintable window, a tintable window having a particular property or characteristic, a specific HVAC component, a communication system component, or the like). Devices may differ in their location (eg, location in a facility or location in a different facility). In some embodiments, user input may be obtained from users associated with the same facility and/or users associated with a different facility.

In some embodiments, whether the state of the device changes due to user input indicative of user preferences with respect to the present state of the device is based at least in part on the user's permission scheme. For example, where the user input indicates a user preference to override the current state of the device to a different state and the permissions scheme indicates that the user can change the state of the device, the device may transition to the state requested by the user. For example, where user input indicates a user preference to override the device's current state to a different state and the permissions scheme indicates that the user is not allowed to change the device's state, the user preference may have no effect and the device may not translate into a user request status. In some embodiments, user input is recorded (eg, in a database) and/or otherwise considered by the machine learning model, depending on the permissions scheme for the user. For example, where user input is ineffective, the user input may not be recorded and/or may not otherwise be considered by the machine learning model. For example, where user input plays a role, the user input may be recorded and/or may otherwise be taken into account by the machine learning model. In some embodiments, user input is recorded (eg, in a database) and/or otherwise considered by a machine learning model, independent of a permission scheme for the user. For example, where user input is ineffective, user input may still be recorded and/or may still be otherwise considered by the machine learning model.

In some embodiments, the behavioral model is trained based at least in part on user feedback. User feedback may indicate the user preference status of the controllable devices of the facility under a particular set of conditions. Behavioral models can be used to predict user preference states of controllable devices by learning from user feedback. User feedback may include override commands to override the current state of the controllable device, direct feedback indicating a requested state of the controllable device, and/or indication of a change in directionality of the controllable device or the environment in which the controllable device is placed Indirect feedback of directional changes. An example of an override is a request to change the tint state of one or more tintable windows from the current tint state to a different tint state. An example of direct feedback is a request to change the tint state of one or more tintable windows to a specific tint level (eg, "Level 4", "Level 3"). Direct feedback can be actionable or non-actionable. For example, the feedback is not operable where the user does not have permission to change the current state of the controllable device. An example of indirect feedback is "the room is too bright", "the room is too hot", etc. Indirect feedback can be actionable or non-actionable. Feedback is operable, for example, where the user does have permission to change the current state of the controllable device. In some embodiments, where indirect feedback is operable, the target controllable device and/or the target state of the target controllable device may be identified based at least in part on the indirect feedback. In one example, where the indirect feedback is that the room is too hot, (I) can identify a target controllable device for one or more tintable windows located in the room, and can place the one or more tintable windows the target state of the HVAC system component to be identified as a darker tone level than the current tone level, and/or (II) the target controllable device of the HVAC system component disposed in the room can be identified, and the target state of the HVAC system component can be identified as Have a lower temperature threshold setting than the current temperature threshold setting.

In some embodiments, the behavioral model is trained based at least in part on user feedback by constructing training samples based on (eg, historical) user feedback and providing those training samples to the behavioral model. Training samples can be constructed for actionable feedback and/or for non-actionable feedback (eg, separately or cumulatively). Behavioral models may be trained based on user feedback from users of one facility and/or from users of various facilities. The various facilities may have at least one common facility characteristic (e.g., being located in the same place (e.g., the same state, county, or country), being a single-family home, being a multi-family home, being a skyscraper, being an office building, and/or server for the same purpose).

In some embodiments, behavioral models are trained during times of low facility occupancy (eg, nighttime, holidays, and/or facility closing times). In some embodiments, behavioral models may be trained in response to (I) events, such as events logged in a calendar, and/or (II) meeting or exceeding a threshold number of received user feedback. Calendar events may include: change to new month, change to new season, change to new year, change of season, or the like. Feedback may include direct user feedback (such as overwriting) and/or indirect user feedback.

In some embodiments, the projected hue state is determined by one or more models. In some embodiments, the (eg, suggested or acted upon) schedule is overridden by user input(s) indicating user preference(s). In some embodiments, user input(s) resulting in overriding(s) of tone state(s) may be included as input to the behavioral model(s) for predicting user preference(s) (multiple) training samples. In some embodiments, the behavioral model(s) may be based at least in part on user input(s) and/or user feedback(s) (e.g., a ( multiple) overridden user input, user feedback regarding the state of the device, such as the tint status of a schedule window, lighting conditions, temperature, gas concentration, or the like to predict the tint status override. In some embodiments , logic (eg, as by a control system implementer) may utilize weather information, facility information (eg, facility layout, 3D model of a facility, or the like) in relation to a behavioral model that predicts user preferences.

In some embodiments, the behavioral model determines an action and/or a suggestion for an action to be taken. Actions may include overriding of hue states determined based on weather models, facility (eg, building) models, hue schedules, or the like. The override of the tint state can be a one-time override applied at the current time, or an automatic override applied in response to the detection of a specific set of conditions. Suggestions for actions may include suggestions to implement specific overrides of the hue state. Suggestions can be presented to the user with direct control of the window. Advice may be presented, for example, to a facility (eg, building) operations manager who has direct control of the user's window.

Figure 10 shows a schematic representation example of the interaction between a control system, a behavioral model, and a tintable window, according to some embodiments. FIG. 10 shows room 1000 . Occupant 1002 is located in room 1000 . Room 1000 includes tintable windows 1004 . The tint state of the tintable window 1004 is controlled by the control system 1006 . Control system 1006 receives input from one or more sensors, such as from multi-sensor device 1008 . The one or more sensors may include one or more light sensors, one or more infrared sensors, one or more temperature sensors, one or more gases (e.g., humidity and/or _CO2 ) sensor, one or more air flow sensors, or the like. In some embodiments, multi-sensor device 1008 is positioned outside of a building including room 1000, eg, to collect sensor data indicative of weather conditions outside and/or outside of the building. In some embodiments, multi-sensor device 1008 is positioned inside a building, eg, to collect sensor data indicative of environmental conditions inside and/or within the building. Control system 1006 receives input from building model 1010 . In some embodiments, the building model 1010 includes a glare model associated with the tintable window 1004, a reflection model associated with the tintable window 1004, and/or the like. The behavioral model 1012 is trained using user feedback from the occupants 1002 . The behavioral model can reside on a processor located in the facility or off-site (eg, in the cloud). User feedback may be received via an application executing on a user device, such as the occupant's 1002 user device, such as a phone, laptop, or tablet. Behavior model 1012 determines actions based at least in part on user feedback from occupants 1002 . Actions may include overriding a device (eg, hue) state determined by the control system 1006 . As another example, an action may include proposing and/or suggesting overriding a device (eg, hue) state determined by the control system 1006 . In some embodiments, the output of behavioral model 1012 is provided to control system 1006 . The output of the behavior model 1012 may be used by the control system 1006 to modify or update the state of the device (eg, tint) determined by the control system 1006 , eg, to better align with user preferences (such as those of the occupant 1002 ).

In some embodiments, the behavioral model is implemented in relation to an instructive model that determines the status of controllable devices of the facility. An instructive model (or set of models) determines the target tint state for a tintable window. An instructive model (or set of models) can transmit indications of such target tint states to associated controllers (eg, network controllers and/or window controllers) to cause the target tint states to be achieved. An instructive model (or set of models) can determine the target lighting state of a facility's lighting system components. An instructive model (or set of models) may transmit an indication of such a target lighting state to the relevant controller to cause the target lighting state to be achieved. The instructive model may be based at least in part on (e.g., raw or processed) sensor values (e.g., values from physical sensors), predicted sensor values (e.g., predicted values from virtual sensors) , facility models, weather information, occupancy information (eg, occupancy plans for facilities), and/or scheduling information. In one example, the predicted sensor values are used to calculate predicted values associated with virtual sensors, eg, virtual sensors positioned where no physical sensors exist. In some embodiments, the hue state determined by the guided model is influenced and/or modified by user input. For example, user input may include indicating during a particular occupancy level (e.g., when a room is occupied, or when a room is unoccupied) at a particular time of day, day of the week, time of year (e.g. , month, season, or similar) user schedule information for hue schedules. As another example, user input may include direct and/or indirect feedback. Direct feedback may include a specific requested target state of a controllable device, such as a specific tint state for a tintable window (eg, "tint level 4" or the like), a specific lighting level for a lighting device, or the like. Indirect feedback may include a requested directional change in the state of a controllable device, such as making a tintable window darker or brighter, lighting a lighting device brighter or less bright, and the like. Direct feedback and/or indirect feedback can be used to train behavioral models. Behavioral models can be used to generate predicted user preferences for controllable devices. The predicted user preference may be provided as an action, such as a suggestion to implement an override of the device state determined based on the instructive model, or the override may be implemented automatically based on the predicted user preference. The behavioral model can be used to override a state determined based at least in part on the guiding model and/or scheduling information.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the interaction between the instructional model 1102 , the behavioral model 1103 , and the user input(s) 1110 . As depicted, the instructional model 1102 is based at least in part on a 3D facility (eg, building) model (denoted "3DM" in FIG. 11 ), raw sensor values 1106 , and predicted sensor values 1108 . In some embodiments, predicted sensor values 1108 correspond to predicted values of virtual sensors. A virtual sensor may be at a location where no physical sensor exists, such as between two physical sensors, adjacent to a physical sensor, or the like. User input(s) 1110 may include scheduling information 1112 and/or direct and/or indirect feedback 1114 . In some embodiments, user input(s) 1110 are obtained via a user interface, such as a user interface that allows the user to enter scheduling-based rules, allows the user to provide direct feedback (e.g., changes based at least in part on Override requests for tint states determined by the guided model 1102, user interfaces that change the state of (e.g., lighting) devices determined at least in part based on the guided model 1102, and/or allow the user A user interface that provides feedback on the current (eg, hue) state of the device. In some embodiments, this user interface is presented via an application, such as an application executing on a user's user device, a user device installed on a wall associated with a facility (eg, a building). As depicted, the behavioral model 1103 is trained using user input(s) 1110 . Behavioral model 1103 may obtain user input data during the time during which the user input data was planned prior to generating predicted user preferences 1116 . Predicted user preferences 1116 may include suggestions for implementing specific hue state overrides related to those determined by the directive model 1102 and/or the schedule information 1112 .

In some embodiments, the first behavioral model is trained for a facility (eg, a building). In some embodiments, the second behavioral model is based at least in part on (i) the first behavioral model and/or (ii) user feedback training from other facilities. The second behavioral model may incorporate user feedback from facilities similar to the facility(s) associated with the first behavioral model. In some embodiments, facilities may be similar in (e.g., at least one facility characteristic as disclosed herein. At least one facility characteristic may include: (I) geographic location (e.g., latitude, longitude, country, city, state, or similar), (II) the type of building or facility and/or client vertical (e.g., commercial, residential, office, industrial, or the like), or (III) architectural feature(s) (e.g., floor number of buildings or facilities facing, window types and/or window sizes, or the like). By allowing behavioral models associated with a particular facility to be based at least in part on usage associated with other (e.g., similar) facilities A more robust behavioral model can be trained with feedback training from occupants. A more robust behavioral model can take into account preferences expressed by occupants of a building. A more robust behavioral model can take into account preferences of occupants of similar facilities.

In some embodiments, the first behavioral model for the facility is stored and/or trained on an in-premises device (eg, a server) associated with the facility. The first behavioral model may be stored and/or trained on a remote device (eg, server, cloud device, etc.) away from the facility. The first behavioral model may communicate data from (eg, transmit data to and/or receive data from the second behavioral model) a second behavioral model that incorporates data from the plurality of facilities. For example, a first behavioral model may transmit a subset of user feedback data to a second behavioral model. For example, the second behavioral model may transmit parameters associated with training weights for incorporation into the first behavioral model, eg, allowing the first behavioral model to benefit from a larger training set used by the second behavioral model. In some embodiments, the second training model is stored on a remote device (eg, server, cloud device, etc.). The remote device may be the same as or different from the remote device associated with the first behavioral model.

In some embodiments, behavioral models provide actionable information. Actionable information may be provided to occupants of the facility, to facility operations managers, to entities developing instructional models for device (eg, smart window) control, or the like. In one example, a first behavioral model associated with a facility may provide information to (i) an occupant of the facility, (ii) a building operations manager, and/or (iii) a customer service manager. The information provided may indicate user feedback from occupants of the facility. Actionable information may aggregate user feedback across occupants of the facility or portions of the facility (eg, various zones of the facility). In some embodiments, the actionable information may specify specific enclosures (eg, rooms) of the facility, specific areas of the facility (eg, floors). An example of actionable information is "72% of occupants of Conference Room 1 prefer a darker tint level in the afternoon." In some embodiments, actionable information may be presented such that a tint state (e.g., at least partially Overrides based on schedule information and/or directive model decisions). For example, actionable information may be presented in relation to a user prompt that, when selected, causes a particular override to occur. In one example, the actionable information "72% of occupants of Conference Room 1 prefer darker tone levels in the afternoon" could be overridden with "Do you want to implement an override for tone level 3 to tone level 4 at 2 p.m. ?” appears as a user prompt. In another example, a second behavioral model incorporating user feedback from multiple buildings and/or facilities may be indicative of occupant preferences for a particular type of building (e.g., occupants who share a workplace, occupants with floor-to-ceiling windows) occupants of a meeting room, or similar), occupants at a specific time and/or geographic location (e.g., occupants in a northern hemisphere building in summer, occupants of a room facing east in the morning, or the like) , and/or any suitable combination of information to the building operations manager and/or customer service manager. Actionable information may aggregate user feedback from users of buildings or facilities judged to be similar. An example of actionable information is "78% of users in similar buildings prefer darker tint levels in the morning." Preferences and/or settings (e.g., scheduling information, default state of devices, etc.) Responses to user prompts and/or updates based on responses to actionable information. Preferences and/or settings can be related to a single controllable device and/or groups of related controllable devices (e.g., groups of tintable windows in a particular zone or area of a building, lighting in a specific zone or area of a building) group of devices, etc.)

Figure 12 shows a schematic example representation of the interaction between behavioral models according to some embodiments. As depicted, a first behavioral model 1202 associated with a facility receives user feedback 1204 . User feedback may relate to the current device state of the device, such that in this example, the tint setting of window 1206 may be tinted. User feedback 1204 may be direct feedback and/or indirect feedback. Direct feedback may correspond to explicit user overrides of tint settings. Indirect feedback may indicate that a particular setting does or does not match user preferences, such as a tint setting that is too bright or too dark. In some embodiments, user feedback 1204 is obtained via an application, such as an application executing on a user device, which in this example is a mobile phone 1215 . First behavioral model 1202 is trained at least in part based on user feedback 1204, which may include feedback from one user or more (e.g., at least about five, ten, twenty, one hundred, one thousand) , or ten thousand) user feedback from users. First behavioral model 1202 may be operatively (eg, communicatively) coupled with second behavioral model 1208 in communication path 1216 . The first behavioral model 1202 and the second behavioral model 1208 can exchange data and/or parameters (eg, weights) associated with each behavioral model. Second behavioral model 1208 is trained based at least in part on user feedback 1210 from other facilities. The other facilities may be similar to the buildings and/or facilities associated with the first behavioral model 1204 based on any suitable criteria, criteria, and/or combination of feature(s) (eg, as disclosed herein). The second behavioral model 1208 communicates actionable information 1212 (e.g., a suggestion to override the tone state), e.g., to a facility manager, customer service manager, entity associated with the training instructional model and/or behavioral model, or any other authorized personnel. In some embodiments, the first behavioral model 1202 is trained based at least in part on information from the second behavioral model 1208 . For example, the first behavioral model 1202 may be trained using transfer learning techniques to incorporate learned parameters from the second behavioral model 1208 .

In some embodiments, user feedback is obtained from explicitly provided user preferences regarding the current tint setting of the tintable window. In some embodiments, user feedback is direct feedback. In some embodiments, the direct feedback may be an indication to override a specific tone level. In some embodiments, user feedback is indirect feedback. Indirect feedback may be related to user preferences regarding the current tint setting (e.g., user preference slightly darker than the current tint setting, user preference far darker than the current tint setting, user preference slightly brighter than the current tint setting, far user preference for a brighter tint than the current tint setting, or similar). In some embodiments, feedback can be obtained regardless of whether the user has permission to implement the override. For example, in some embodiments, feedback may be obtained in situations where a user may be allowed to implement an override and in situations where the user may not be familiar with hue levels. In some embodiments, feedback may be obtained where the user does not have permission to implement the override. In some embodiments, the feedback may be converted to a target state of the controllable device based at least in part on a result of changing the current state of the controllable device in a direction indicative of the feedback. Feedback can be direct or indirect.

Figure 13 shows an example of the use of obtained user feedback according to some embodiments. The user interface 1302 is used to obtain direct feedback indicating the specific tint level to which the tint state of the tintable window 1304 is to be overwritten. As depicted, user interface 1302 includes a plurality of selectable inputs each corresponding to a different hue level. A specific hue level can be selected by the user from the available hue levels, which in the example of FIG. 13 constitute four hue levels arranged from lightest to darkest hue: hue 1, hue 2, hue 3 , and hue4. In some embodiments, selecting a particular selectable input (eg, “Hue 4”) may cause tintable window 1304 to transition to the tint state corresponding to the selected input of user interface 1302 . Indirect feedback regarding the tint status of the tintable window 1304 is obtained using the user interface 1306 . As depicted, user interface 1306 includes selectable inputs each corresponding to a user's relative satisfaction with the current tint state of tintable window 1304 . For example, user interface 1306 includes options corresponding to "brighter" (eg, indicating a user preference for tinting the window to a relatively brighter tint than the current tint that window 1304 appears to be), "darker" (eg, , indicating a user preference for tinting the window to a relatively darker tint than the current tint that window 1304 appears to be), and "just right" (e.g., indicating that the current tint state of window 1304 is acceptable to the user) optional input for . Where the user of user interface 1306 has permission to enable overriding of the tint state of tintable window 1304, selection of a selectable input of user interface 1306 results in overriding of the current tint state based on the selected input. In some embodiments, the corresponding tone level is calculated before overwriting is effected. For example, where the tint level is now 3 and "darker" is selected in the UI 1306, a new darker tint level is determined (eg, tint level 4) and set to the darker tint level ( For example, an override of tone level 4) works. In the event that the user of the user interface does not have permission to effectuate an override of the tint state of the tintable window 1304 , no action is performed based on input received via the user interface 1306 . Where the user of user interface 1302 has permission to enable overriding of the tint state of tintable window 1304, selection of a selectable input of user interface 1302 results in overriding of the current tint state based on the selected input. In some embodiments, the corresponding tone level is calculated before overwriting is effected. For example, where hue level is now 3 and hue 2 is selected in user interface 1302, a new hue level for hue 2 is determined and an override to hue level 2 is effected. In the event that the user of the user interface does not have permission to effectuate an override of the tint state of the tintable window 1304 , no action is performed based on input received via the user interface 1302 . Tinable windows can be adjusted to discrete tone levels (eg, four tone levels) or continuous tone levels. The discrete hue levels can be at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 15, or 20 discrete tint levels.

In some embodiments, a user user (such as 1302 or 1306 ) is provided to an occupant of the building based at least in part on the permissions associated with the occupant. For example, in situations where the occupant is not allowed to override the tint state of the device (e.g., the state of the tintable window 1304), a user interface may be provided, and data obtained from the user interface may be used to train a behavioral model without implementing Actions on data obtained from the user interface. In one example, a user interface (e.g., 1306) may be provided to occupants of a shared work area (e.g., a co-working space or conference room) to allow the occupants to provide feedback on tone level without any specific Feedback changes the tonal level in the shared work area. As another example, where the occupant is allowed to override the tint state of the tintable window 1304 and the occupant is familiar with the meaning of the various tint levels, the user interface 1302 may be provided to the occupant to allow the occupant to have a control over the tintable window 1304. Direct control of window 1304. An occupant may be able to choose between (i) a relative user interface (eg, 1306 ) and (ii) a discrete user interface (eg, 1302 ).

FIG. 13 shows an example of providing data obtained via a user interface (eg, 1302 and/or 1306 ) to a behavioral model 1308 . Behavior may be handled locally in the facility in which the device to be adjusted is located or external to the facility (eg, in the cloud). Behavior model 1308 may obtain data from one or more users, eg, at least one, two, five, ten, twenty, one hundred, one thousand, or ten thousand users. In some embodiments, the behavioral model 1308 obtains data from one or more sensors 1310, such as from one or more collectives of devices, such as multi-sensor devices. An example of a multi-sensor device is sky sensor 1312 . An example of a collective of devices enclosed in a housing is 1310 disposed in frame portion 1311 .

In some embodiments, data is obtained to train a behavioral model based on user responses to suggestions provided by the behavioral model. For example, in some embodiments, a suggestion to enable an override of a controllable device is provided to an occupant of an enclosure (eg, a room), and data is obtained based at least in part on user responses to the suggestion. In some embodiments, recommendations may be based, at least in part, by other occupants (e.g., in similar enclosures (e.g., rooms) or facilities (e.g., buildings), at similar times of day, under similar conditions , or similar) implemented overrides. In one example, the suggestion may be based at least in part on a determination that a current set of conditions associated with the controllable device matches a rule identified by the behavioral model for the set of conditions. In one instance, the suggestion was "67% of occupants already preferred a darker tint state under similar conditions, would you like to implement it now?" In another instance, the suggestion was "74% of occupants in similar Conditions already favor brighter light from overhead lighting, would you like to implement it now?" In some embodiments, the responses to suggestions can be used as additional training data for the behavioral model.

Figure 14 shows an example of a user interface that may be used to obtain responses to suggestions, according to some embodiments. As depicted, the behavioral model 1408 results in recommendations being presented via the user interface 1402 . The user interface 1402 may include suggestions such as "67% of occupants have preferred a darker tint state under similar conditions, would you like to do so now?" Responses to suggestions are obtained via the user interface 1402 . In some embodiments, the response is used to override the current tint state of the tintable window 1404 . In some embodiments, the behavioral model 1408 receives sensor data from one or more sensors (eg, from a collective of one or more devices, such as a multi-sensor device). Behavior model 1408 may optionally obtain input data 1406 from one or more other facilities, such as facility(s) determined to be similar in at least one facility characteristic to the facility associated with tintable window 1404 . In some embodiments, the data obtained by behavioral model 1408 is data indicative of overriding actions of occupants of a plurality of other buildings and/or facilities. In some embodiments, data is clustered based at least in part on building and/or facility characteristics. Input 1406 may be provided as (e.g., real-time and/or historical) sensor data, (e.g., clustered) override data, (e.g., clustered) input data from other users, predictions, or any combination. Data can be raw or processed. The user responses are provided to the behavioral model 1408 as additional training data. The example depicted in Figure 14 uses a controllable device that is a tintable window 1404, however, the same example is applicable to any other controllable device having various controllable states.

In some embodiments, one or more user interfaces are presented and information about the user's environment is provided to the user. For example, a user interface may be presented and indicate (i) one or more current tint states of one or more windows in the user's environment, (ii) an interpretation of a scheduled action, or (iii) an action in progress . The user's environment may be in an enclosure comprising (a) a room in which the user is currently located, (b) a room associated with the user's office, or (c) a railroad car in which the user is located. A scheduled action may include a scheduled hue transition, or any other scheduled change in a controllable state of a controllable device. An explanation of an action in progress may include a description of the action that is taking place, the action that is scheduled to occur, the reason for the action, and/or the scheduling of the action. In one example, the user interface may present a graphical representation of the user's environment (eg, a map, such as a simplified map). The graphical representation may include an indication of one or more windows within the user's enclosure environment and/or an indication of other controllable devices within the user's environment (eg, locations of lighting devices, air flow vents, etc.). Indications of one or more devices (eg, tintable windows) may include indications of current and/or future controllable (eg, tint) status. Indicators may include representations that a particular device may act in a manner that indicates the present controllable state of the device, representations that may emphasize a particular controllable device to indicate that the controllable device is about to begin transitioning to a future state. For example, an indicator may include a representation that a particular window may be colored in a manner that indicates a current tint state, a representation that a particular window may be emphasized to indicate that the window may soon begin transitioning to a future state, or the like. The user interface may present an explanation of the action in progress. For example, darkening the windows to control glare, brightening the windows to allow heating from the sun, darkening the windows to reduce the need for air conditioning, or the like. The indication of the action in progress may be presented in relation to an assessment of the time remaining to complete the action in progress (eg, 8 minutes remaining, 10 minutes remaining, 12 minutes remaining, or the like). The user interface can present an indication of the next scheduled action associated with the controllable device. An indication of the next scheduled action may be presented in relation to other relevant information, such as (i) the time of the scheduled action and/or (ii) the reason for the scheduled action. For example, the reason for the scheduled action may be to brighten a window to maximize daylight, darken a window to reduce the need for air conditioning, or the like. The indication of the scheduled action may be presented in relation to the indication of the user of the scheduled action. For example, a user viewing a user interface for scheduling actions, actions being scheduled by a facility operations manager and/or other facility managers, or the like.

In some embodiments, a user interface is presented that presents information about the user's health information related to the user's environment. In one example, a user interface may be presented that indicates the user's total solar exposure (eg, due to tinting of one or more windows in the environment). A user interface may be presented indicating circadian stimuli associated with the environment (eg, as a percentage value). For example, due to one or more windows and/or coloration based at least in part on solar time. A user interface may be presented indicative of information based at least in part on one or more sensors positioned within the user's environment. For example, one or more airflow sensors, one or more VOC sensors indicating air quality associated with the environment, and/or the like. A user interface may be presented indicating one or more suggestions to modify the environment. Examples of such suggestions may include (a) suggestions to modify the tint schedule associated with one or more windows, and/or (b) suggestions to go for a walk (eg, to get fresh air) at a specific time. The tone schedule can be modified to improve (i) the amount of sunlight exposure, and/or (ii) the amount of circadian stimulation.

In some embodiments, the user interface presents weather information. Examples of weather information may include current and/or forecasted (1) temperature(s) (eg, high temperature, low temperature, or the like), (2) precipitation, (3) cloud cover, (4) sun intensity, (5) ) humidity level, and/or (6) any other weather-related information. In some embodiments, weather information may be obtained from one or more third-party weather services, based at least in part on data from one or more sensors, based at least in part on the output of one or more machine learning models, or obtained in any combination. In some embodiments, one or more sensors may be located (eg, mounted) outside of the facility where the user is located. In some embodiments, one or more sensors may be located (eg, installed) inside the facility where the user is present.

In some embodiments, the user interface presents solar conditions relative to the effect of one or more windows on sunlight exposure. The user interface may indicate (eg, based at least in part on the window's geographic orientation) a time frame during which the sun is predicted to shine on the window. The time frame can be determined based at least in part on the current time of year and/or the current day of the year. The user interface may indicate the sun penetration depth (eg, 8 feet, 10 feet, or the like) at a particular time of day and/or relative to a particular window at a particular time of day. The user interface may include one or more user interface controls that allow the user to input and/or provide a specific time of day, such that the user interface is updated to show the effect of solar conditions on the user-entered time of day. Examples of such user interface controls include sliders, drop-down menus, or the like.

In some embodiments, a user interface that provides information about the user's environment is presented through an application. The application may be executed on a user's device, such as the user's mobile device (e.g., a mobile phone, tablet, laptop, or the like), or the user's configured to operate the application (herein also abbreviated as "app"). The application may execute on a shared user device, such as a user device mounted or otherwise attached to a wall of a building, a user device associated with a shared space (e.g., meeting room, garden area, etc.), or similar. The application may receive information (e.g., ongoing and/or future window tint changes, user-associated health information, weather information, information related to the effect of solar conditions on one or more windows, etc.). Where the user interface presents information based at least in part on the user's location within the facility, the user's location may be based at least in part on identifying the user's location and/or identifying one or Geolocation technology (eg, using UWB tags, using RF and/or WiFi sensing, or the like) determination of the controllable device(s).

In some embodiments, the application presents the user's predicted (eg, simulated) settings of the controllable device. This setting can be controllable. The simulation can utilize any artificial intelligence method (eg, such as incorporated into a learning module as disclosed herein). A predictive setting may be a setting that will be selected by the control system (eg, automatically) for the device. The forecast settings can reflect the default settings of the control system. For example, an app may present forecast tint shades for tintable windows, forecast temperatures for HVAC systems, forecast media presented by media devices, forecast lighting for lighting systems, forecast odors to be emitted by odor conditioning systems, forecast music to be played by sound systems , the forecasted humidity forecasted to be adjusted by the humidity control system, or any combination thereof. A forecast setting may be a setting that would be in the facility without control system intervention (ie, the state the facility would be in if no controlled action had intervened). The forecast settings may include environment settings of the facility. Forecast settings may include settings for devices in the facility. The user may be able to select which type of forecast interests the user when viewing (eg, using an app). For example, the application may present a choice between a forecast environment setting with intervention of the control system or without intervention of the control setting. A user may be able to authorize intervention by the control system, set another target value set by a device controlled by the control system (eg, when overriding an automatic decision by the control system), or disable use of the control system to adjust the device. Depending on the user's privilege level and/or schedule, the control system may or may not act upon the user's actions.

Figure 15 shows an example of a user interface for presenting information to a user by an application. User interface 1502 indicates window tint status information, such as the current tint status in one or more windows in the user's environment, an indication of an ongoing tint transition, and/or an indication of the next scheduled action. User interface 1504 indicates health information associated with the user related to the user's environment, such as sunlight exposure, circadian stimulation, and information related to air quality (e.g., Air Quality Index (QAI), Nitrogen Dioxide, Particulate matter with an average FLS of 2.5 microns, and sulfur dioxide levels (eg, in micrograms per cubic meter)). User interface 1504 also incorporates suggestions for the user. For example, in a hazardous situation depicted in the air quality score indicator of the user interface 1504, the user is informed of the hazardous situation and advised to activate the air filtration system as soon as possible (ASAP). The user interface 1506 indicates weather information, such as current temperature, current sky conditions, and current sunshine intensity. User interface 1508 presents information indicating the effect of solar conditions on one or more windows in the user's environment.

In some embodiments, one or more user interfaces are presented to obtain user preferences. For example, a user interface may be presented that includes one or more user interface controls for obtaining information about the amount of daylight, glare control, heat control, responsiveness of the window control system, relative User preference for optimal sun penetration depth, or any combination thereof. User preferences may be used to set target tint levels at different times of day and/or in relation to different daylight conditions. The degree of responsiveness of the window control system may include how quickly the window control system causes the tintable windows under the control of the (window) control system to change in response to the predictions of the one or more machine learning models. For example, a user preference indicating a relatively higher degree of glare and thermal control may result in windows in the user's environment being tinted to a relatively lower degree than if the user preference indicated a preference for a relatively lower degree of glare and thermal control. dark level. In another example, a user preference indicating a preference for a relatively higher degree of reactivity may cause one or more windows to begin a tint transition more quickly than if the user preference indicated a preference for a relatively lower degree of reactivity. As another example, a user interface may be presented that includes one or more user interface controls for setting thresholds for one or more parameters. The window tint of one or more windows within the user's environment can be controlled such that the values of one or more parameters are within ranges specified by thresholds. Examples of parameters include (i) preferred light intensity (eg, in lux) and/or (ii) preferred temperature range. Information indicative of preferences (eg, obtained using a user interface) can be communicated to the controller system for use in controlling various devices within the environment. The control system may include a master controller, a remote server, a cloud-based device storing user preferences, or the like.

Figure 16 shows an example of a user interface for obtaining user preferences regarding parameters associated with at least one controllable device that is at least one tintable window. Use user interface 1602 to obtain information including preferred daylight levels, preferred glare and/or thermal control levels, preferred reactivity of one or more tintable windows, and/or preferred sun penetration depths. User Preferences. User interface 1604 is used to obtain user preferences indicating desired ranges for light and/or temperature.

In some embodiments, use of one or more user interfaces is incentivized (eg, to provide feedback). For example, in response to providing input via one or more user interfaces, the user providing the user input may receive credit and/or rewards. Providing input via one or more user interfaces may include indicating feedback regarding a current state of at least a portion of the facility and/or indicating feedback regarding a current state of one or more devices associated with the facility. Reputation and/or rewards may be provided based at least in part on user input provided via one or more user interfaces exceeding a threshold. For example, when user feedback has been provided more than a predetermined number of times (eg, serving as a predetermined threshold). Various types of user feedback may be weighted differently. For example, a first type of user feedback can be considered to be associated with X reputation, and a second type of user feedback can be considered to be associated with Y reputation. The amount of reputation and/or rewards may be aggregated across various users, such as users of an organization and/or users at various organizations and/or facilities. Aggregation can be used for the purpose of generating leaderboards so that multiple users can compete against each other. Reputation and/or rewards may be associated with user accounts. One or more user interfaces may be presented in association with the user account such that use of the one or more user interfaces to achieve reputation and/or rewards (eg, to provide user feedback) is associated with the user account. User accounts used to provide user feedback can be associated with the user's user profile within the organization.

In some embodiments, user input (eg, user feedback) is received in relation to a state of a device of the facility. Devices may include one or more of the following: tintable windows, HVAC components (e.g., air flow vents, heating components, cooling components, or the like), lighting system components, security system components, elevator system components, entertainment system devices ( For example, media displays, speakers, etc.), or similar. Use user input to predict the state of the device at a future time. The state of the device at a future time may be predicted based at least in part on a machine learning model that takes user input into account. A machine learning model may be and/or include one or more machine learning models and/or other computational models that generate a predicted output (eg, a predicted state of a device) based at least in part on the input (a). Inputs may include user input, schedule information, weather information, sensor input, output of other model(s), and/or any combination thereof. Machine learning models may include behavioral models that predict user preferences based at least in part on user input from one or more users. A state of the device at a future time may be proposed and/or suggested, eg, a proposed overwrite of the state of the device to a predicted state at a future time. For example, the state of the device may be suggested to a user providing user input. For example, the state of the device may be proposed to the user (eg, as an overwrite suggestion) in response to determining that the user has authority to control the state of the device. The state of the device may be suggested to users other than the user providing the user input (eg, a facility manager). The state of the device may be proposed to another user in response to a determination that the user providing the user input does not have and/or does not currently have authority to control the state of the device. The device may adjust to a predicted state at a future time (eg, without requesting further user input).

In some embodiments, user input received in relation to the state of a device of a facility is direct feedback that may or may not be operable (eg, by a control system associated with control of the device). Direct feedback may be a request to change the state of the device to a different state. Direct feedback may include requests to override the current state of the device to a different state, such as to override the current tint level of one or more tintable windows to a different tint level, to change the current airflow level of one or more air vents The state is overridden to a different air flow state (eg, to change the direction of air flow, to change the amount of air flow, etc.), to override the current light level of one or more lighting components to a different light level, or the like. In some embodiments, user input received in relation to a state of a device of a facility is indirect feedback indicative of user preference. Indirect feedback may or may not be actionable. For example, indirect feedback may not be operable since the user providing the user input does not have the authority to effectuate changes to the state of the device. Examples of indirect feedback include user preferences regarding the environment of the facility and/or the portion of the facility where the user is located, such as "too hot", "too cold", "too bright", or the like.

In some embodiments, the state of the device changes automatically (eg, without user input). In some embodiments, the state of the device changes with or without regard to user preferences. For example, the state of a device may change automatically and/or without regard to user preferences in response to detection of an emergency situation. In one example, one or more tintable windows can transition to a clear state in response to detection of an emergency situation. As another example, the status of the device may be automatically and/or independent of the status of the device in response to detecting one or more electrical conditions (e.g., the condition of the heating and/or cooling system, the overall electrical usage of the facility, or the like). User preferences change. In one example, the one or more tintable windows may be responsive to a determination that one or more auxiliary regulators of the facility are operating above a threshold operating level and/or in response to detecting that the facility's overall power usage is above threshold The limit is standard and the coloring is darker.

17 shows an example flowchart of a method for predicting a state of a device at a future time and performing an action based at least in part on the predicted state of the device. At block 1701, an input is received from a user indicating that a first state of a device of a facility is to change to a second state. Examples of types of devices include tintable windows, HVAC components, lighting system components, security system components, elevator system components, communication system devices, entertainment system devices, and/or any other controllable devices. An input may be a direct request to change the state of the device from a first state to a second state. The input may relate to user preferences and/or feedback regarding a first state of the device and/or a preference to change the first state to the second state. At block 1702, a third state of the device at a future time is predicted based at least in part by using a machine learning model that considers input from a user. A future time may be one or more future times (eg, 9 a.m. tomorrow, 9 a.m. every weekday, between 7 p.m. and midnight every weekend, etc.). In some embodiments, considering the input from the user includes providing the input to a machine learning model (eg, a behavioral model) that generates a predicted third state of the device at a future time. The machine learning model may consider user input from multiple users who may be associated with the same facility and/or a different facility or facilities. The machine learning model can predict a third state of the device at a future time by identifying rule-based patterns that match the input. At block 1703, (I) propose a third state and/or (II) adjust the device to the third state at a future time. In some embodiments, the third state is proposed as a suggestion. Suggestions may be provided to the user providing the input and/or to another user (eg, a facility manager or other administrator). Proposals may include proposals to overwrite the state of the device to a predicted state at a future time and/or at various future times. Suggestions may be presented via a user interface. In some embodiments, the device is adjusted to the third state (eg, automatically and/or without further user input). In some embodiments, the device is regulated by transmitting instructions to the device to transition to the third state and/or by transmitting commands to one or more controllers that directly and/or indirectly cause the device to transition to the third state into the third state.

In some embodiments, user input received from a user indicating a preference associated with a current state of the device under a set of conditions is stored in a database. In some embodiments, data stored in a database is used (eg, by one or more machine learning models, such as behavioral models) to identify one or more actions associated with the device and the set of conditions. The set of conditions may be based at least in part on user information associated with the user providing the user input (e.g., the user's identifier, the user's role in the organization, etc.), sensor data, time-series information associated with the time at which the user input was provided, geographic information associated with the facility in which the device is installed, building type information associated with the facility in which the device is installed, and/or associated with the room the device is associated with type of room. A set of instance conditions: <user = userid; time=morning; photosensor value= X >. Another set of example conditions is: <room=single-occupancy office; building type=office; time=morning>. Any combination of conditions can be used. Conditions may be specified as being within a range, such as "low,""medium," and/or "high,""morning," or the like.

In some embodiments, one or more actions are identified using the device and the set of conditions and/or are associated with the device and the set of conditions. For example, an action may include a target state of the device under the set of conditions. In one example, the target state may include a target tint state for tintable window lighting, a target air flow level for an air vent, a target light level for a lighting system component, and/or a target state for any other controllable device. In some embodiments, one or more actions are identified based at least in part on identifying rule-based patterns for similar devices and/or similar sets of conditions for data stored in a database. A similar device may be a device of the same type as the device for which the user preference has been received. Rule-based patterns may be identified based at least in part on user preferences received from a plurality of users. Multiple users can be in the same facility and/or in different facilities. Device types may include: tintable windows, HVAC components, lighting system components, entertainment system components, or the like (eg, any of the device types disclosed herein).

18 shows an example flowchart of a method utilizing user input stored in a database. At block 1801, input is obtained from a user indicating preferences associated with the current controllability status of controllable devices of a facility under a set of conditions. The set of conditions may be based at least in part on user information associated with the user providing the user input, sensor data at the time the user input was provided, timing information associated with the time the user input was provided, and device settings at The geographic information associated with the facilities therein, the building type information associated with the facility where the device is installed, and/or the room type associated with the room associated with the device. User information associated with the user providing the user input may include (i) the user's identifier, (ii) the user's role in the organization, and/or (iii) the user's location in the facility (e.g., specified) location. At block 1802, the database is updated to include the user's input. The database can be updated with: the identifier of the device, the identifier of the facility associated with the device, information about the user providing the input (e.g., user identifier, user's role within the organization, etc.), timing information (for example, providing user-entered time), building type information associated with the facility, geographic information associated with the facility, and/or sensor data associated with the set of conditions. At block 1803, an action to be associated with the set of conditions is identified based at least in part on a database. For example, actions may be identified based at least in part on data stored in a database from one or more users. Actions may be identified by one or more machine learning models, such as behavioral models utilizing data stored in a database from one or more users. Actions can be identified by identifying rule-based patterns that match the set of conditions. Actions may include different states of the device, such as a user may prefer under the set of conditions. Actions may include suggestions (eg, to the user providing the user and/or to a different user) to override the current state of the device to a different state of the device, such as a state that the user might prefer under the set of conditions. At block 1804, one or more signals associated with the action are transmitted. One or more signals may cause the device to transition to a different state than the current state (eg, to a state that the user may prefer). One or more signals may result in an offer to be presented to a user (e.g., the user providing the user input and/or a user other than the user providing the user input) to transition the device into a different state than the current state (e.g. transition to a state that the user may prefer).

In some embodiments, a state of a device in a facility is based at least in part on a user input from a user relative to an indicated permission change in a permission scheme associated with the user. For example, user input may indicate preferences associated with the state of the device. In one embodiment, the user input may be a request to change (eg, override) the state of the device to a different state. In one example, the user input may be an indirect user preference related to the device, such as a preference related to the current environment of the portion of the facility where the user is located. Examples of indirect user preferences include "too hot," "too bright," "too cold," or the like.

In some embodiments, whether a user has permission to effect changes to the state of the device is governed by a permissions scheme. The permissions scheme is based at least in part on: (A) organizational hierarchy (e.g., user's role within the organization's employment hierarchy); (B) (i) room type and/or (ii) with (a) device and/or ( b) The type of building the facility is associated with (e.g., whether the room associated with the installation is a shared space or single occupancy, (C) whether the building type is an office building, (D) commercial space, industrial space, etc., or similar) ; (E) the geographic location of the user relative to the device (e.g., whether the user was at the facility at the time the user input was received, whether the user was near the device at the time the user input was received, etc.); (F) security considerations (e.g., whether allowing the user to change the state of the device would trigger a security risk); (F) governance considerations (e.g., whether allowing the user to change the state of the device would violate any rules and/or regulations); and/or (H) energy conservation Considerations (eg, whether allowing the user to change the state of the device would violate energy conservation goals or thresholds associated with the facility). Permission schemes can change over time. For example, the user may have the ability to change the device at a first time and/or a first set of conditions (e.g., on weekends, between hours of 9 a.m. and 5 p.m., when the user is the only occupant of the room, etc.). status, and at a second time and/or under a second set of conditions (e.g., on weekdays, between the hours of 6 p.m. and 8 a.m., when there are other occupants in the room, during a particular calendar month, etc. ) may not have permission to change the state of the device. A permission scheme may specify different permissions for different types of devices. For example, devices associated with a facility's security (eg, media devices accessing external and/or remote computers, outward-facing doors and/or windows, etc.) may have different permissions than devices not associated with the facility's security. In one example, a user with a role of network administrator or system administrator may be allowed to change the state of a compromised device, whereas a user with a different role may not be allowed to change the state of a compromised device. Permission schemes may include voting considerations (eg, voting schemes). For example, a user may have permission to change the state of a device in response to a majority of the other occupants of the room agreeing with the user's preferences. Voting by multiple users can be performed through an application associated with the control of the device.

In some embodiments, user input indicative of a preference associated with a state of a device of a facility is considered in relation to the permissions scheme to determine whether the state of the device is to change. For example, a positive determination or a negative determination is made based at least in part on a permission scheme and/or user input, wherein a positive determination indicates that the state of the device will change, and/or wherein a negative determination indicates that the state of the device will not change. In some embodiments, responsive to a determination that (i) user input indicates that the state of the device will change (e.g., because the current state of the device is not according to the user's preferences), and (ii) the user has a permission based scheme at least in part A positive determination is made for the authority to change the state of the device. Responsive to determining that (I) the user input indicates that the state of the device will not change (e.g., because the current state of the device is according to the user's preferences), or (II) the user does not have the ability to change the state of the device based at least in part on a permission scheme authority to make negative judgments.

19 is an example flowchart of a method of changing a state of a device based at least in part on user input and/or permission schemes. At block 1901, input is received from a user indicating a preference associated with a state of a device of a facility. The input may indicate a user preference to change the state of the device to a different state. The input may indicate that the user is content with the current state of the device. At block 1902, a determination of whether to change the state of the device is made based at least in part on (i) the input and (ii) the user permissions scheme to form a positive or negative determination. A positive determination indicates that the state of the device will change. A positive determination may be made based on (i) an input indicating that the user prefers to change the state of the device, and (ii) a permission scheme indicating that the user has permission to cause the state of the device to change. A negative decision indicates that the state of the device will not change. A negative determination may be made based on (i) an input indicating that the user does not wish to change the state of the device, or (ii) a permission scheme indicating that the user does not have permission to change the state of the device. At block 1903, a positive determination is used to change the state of the device. For example, instructions may be transmitted to one or more controllers that directly and/or indirectly control the device to cause the device to transition to a different state than the current state. The different states may correspond to states requested by input from the user. For example, different states can be identified, for example, by one or more machine learning models. One or more machine learning models may take into account input received from a user.

In some embodiments, the behavioral model is used to override the current state of the controllable device based at least in part (e.g., the current tint state of one or more tintable windows, the current light level of one or more lighting devices, etc. ) to identify one or more actions upon receipt of the override command. For example, a determination can be made whether an override matches a rule-based pattern identified by the behavioral model. For example, where an override overrides the current state of the device to a different state, a determination is made whether the override transitioning to the different state matches a rule-based pattern identified by the behavioral model. For example, in the case where an override is overriding the current tint state (eg, level 3) to a darker tint state (eg, level 4), does the override making the transition to a darker tint state the same as defined by the behavior A decision based on rule-based pattern matching identified by the model. A rule-based pattern may indicate, for example, that the tint state is under certain conditions such as sensor values within a certain range and/or exceeding thresholds, sun incidence angles within certain ranges and/or exceeding thresholds, sun penetration depth Within a certain range and/or exceeding a threshold, and/or a time of day within a certain range) will transition to a darker tone state and/or a specific tone state (eg, level 4). The rule-based patterns and/or override data can be stored in a database (eg, an override database), and a determination of whether an override matches a rule-based pattern can be made by querying the database.

In some embodiments, the one or more actions identified by the behavioral model include adjusting the controllable device to a state associated with matching the overridden rule-based pattern. For example, where the controllable device includes one or more tintable windows, the one or more actions may include actuating a specific tint state override associated with a rule-based pattern matching the override, and/or providing an implementation Suggestions for hue state overrides associated with rule-based patterns that match direct overrides. For example, in a rule-based mode indicating that the tint state is to be overridden by a darker tint state (e.g., one tint level darker than the current level, two tint levels darker than the current level, etc.) and/or overriding Where written to a particular darker state, the one or more actions may include automatically transitioning to the darker state and/or automatically presenting a suggestion to transition to the darker state. The suggestion may include an interpretation of the suggested transition to the target state indicated by the rule-based pattern of the controllable device. For example, suggestions may include an indication of the percentage of other occupants who have preferred the target state under similar conditions, the number of times users have requested the same override under similar conditions, or the like. Similar conditions may include weather conditions, values of one or more sensors within certain ranges and/or exceeding certain thresholds, and/or receiving overrides at similar times of day.

In some embodiments, user responses to actions identified by the behavioral model are obtained. For example, where the action includes automatically overriding the state of the device to the state associated with the identified rule-based pattern, the user response may include whether the user made further adjustments to the controllable state of the device (e.g., returning to the original state, requesting additional state changes along the same direction as the override, or similar). As another example, where the action includes presenting a suggestion to overwrite the current state to the overridden state, the suggestion may include optional user input confirming the state to transition to (e.g., "Do you want to change the colorable Override the current tint state of the window to level 4?"; "Do you want to turn off overhead light?"; etc.), and the user response may include a user response obtained via an optional input. The behavioral model can be updated based at least in part on user responses to actions. For example, user responses to actions can be used to construct additional training samples for use in further training of the behavioral model. As another example, user responses may be added to a database storing data indicative of user feedback under various conditions and/or storing rule-based patterns identified by behavioral models. In one example, where the user responds to a confirmation action, the database may be updated to enforce the association of the set of conditions with the action. In another example, where the user response indicates disapproval of the action, the database may be updated to de-associate the set of conditions from the action. For example, making the association weaker may result in a lower chance of performing an action. A user response indicating disapproval of the action may result in manual review of the rule-based schema associated with the action to be initiated. A user response indicating disapproval of the action may result in a temporary suppression of the invocation of the rule-based mode.

While some of the examples provided herein relate to a controllable device related to a tintable window, and to a controllable state of a tint state associated with a tintable window; replace.

20 shows an example flow diagram for identifying an action based at least in part on an override. At block 2001, an override command is obtained. Overrides associated with particular controllable devices and/or groups of controllable devices may be obtained. Grouping can be based on zone, device functionality, and/or device type. In one example, the override is related to a particular tintable window and/or region or group of tintable windows. In another example, the override is related to a particular lighting fixture or group of lighting fixtures. An override may indicate the direction in which the current state is to be overridden, the extent to which the current state is to be overridden, and/or a particular override state. In some embodiments, the override command is obtained via an application. In some embodiments, the application is executing on a user device, such as a mobile device of the user providing the override command, a user device associated with a room or area of a building and/or facility. At block 2002, an override command is implemented. For example, transitioning the tint state of the tintable window and/or the region of the tintable window to the tint state corresponding to the override command. As another example, the lighting level of one or more lighting devices is changed according to the override command. In some embodiments, overriding is implemented according to a permissions scheme. For example, the overriding is implemented in response to determining that the overriding is allowed. Whether overriding is permitted may be determined based at least in part on a permissions scheme. At block 2003, a determination is made whether the override matches the rule-based pattern. The determination may be made by querying a database (eg, a database associated with a behavioral model) for one or more parameters associated with overriding. Where the override is associated with the tint state of one or more tintable windows, the one or more parameters may include the direction of the tint override (e.g., darker, lighter, or the like) and/or Write associated tint levels, information related to tintable windows and/or areas of tintable windows (e.g., tintable window identifiers, area identifiers, geographic orientation of tintable windows and/or areas of tintable windows orientation, size information associated with the tintable window and/or tintable windows in the zone, or the like), and/or information indicating environmental conditions at the time associated with the override (e.g., associated with one or more sensor sensor values associated with the sensor, sun incidence angle, sun penetration depth, time of day, time of year, weather information, or the like). Where a rule-based pattern is identified, the rule-based pattern may be associated with a particular action (eg, a particular override to implement, a suggestion for a particular override to provide, or the like). At block 2003 , if it is determined that the override does not match the rule-based pattern (“NO” at 2003 ), the process ends at block 2007 . If it is determined that the override matches the rule-based pattern (“Yes” at 2003 ), at block 2004 the action associated with the matched rule-based pattern is implemented. For example, where the action corresponds to actuating an automatic override under the set of conditions associated with the rule-based mode (and/or associated with the direct override command), the control system may be updated to indicate the transition to the overridden state Automatic overrides will be performed in response to detection of the set of conditions. As another example, in instances where the action corresponds to providing a suggestion to implement an override, a suggestion may be provided. At optional block 2005, a user response to the action may be obtained. For example, a user response may be a response to a suggestion provided (eg, a user response that agrees with the suggestion provided, a user response that disagrees with the suggestion provided). As another example, the user response may include further adjustments to the state of the device. At optional block 2006, the database and/or user preferences may be updated. For example, a database including override data may be updated based at least in part on user responses. As another example, additional training samples can be constructed to provide further training of the behavioral model. In some embodiments, user preferences may be adjusted, eg, to indicate updated preferences for the state of the controllable device based at least in part on the set of conditions when the direct override command was received. The program ends at block 2007.

In some embodiments, actions based at least in part on indirect feedback are determined using a behavioral model. The indirect feedback may include user preferences regarding the tint state of one or more tintable windows, wherein the user providing the indirect feedback is not permitted to change the tint state of the one or more tintable windows. Indirect feedback can be that the current tone state is too bright, too dark, etc. Indirect feedback may include user preferences related to temperature that may be affected by tint state. Indirect feedback can be that the current room temperature is too hot, too cold, etc. Actions may include providing recommendations to a building operations manager and/or facility manager to override the status of one or more controllable devices based on indirect feedback. A suggestion based at least in part on indirect feedback indicating that the current tint state is too bright and/or the current room temperature is too hot may be to transition one or more tintable windows to a darker tint state. A suggestion based at least in part on indirect feedback indicating that the current tint state is too dark and/or the current room temperature is too cold may be to transition one or more tintable windows to a lighter tint state. Actions may include causing automatic overriding of the state of the controllable device (eg, without requiring manual input).

In some embodiments, the determination of one or more actions is identified based at least in part on a parameter associated with the received indirect feedback matching a parameter associated with the rule-based pattern identified by the behavioral model. The one or more actions may be based at least in part on determining the direction of the tint change of one or more tintable windows indicated by (i) the indirect feedback and/or (ii) a set of conditions upon receipt of the indirect feedback and based on The corresponding parameters of the pattern of the rule match to identify. A rule-based pattern may indicate that certain hue state overrides are to be implemented in response to detection of a certain set of conditions. Actions may occur where indirect feedback matches a particular hue state override and that particular set of conditions. Actions may include (i) providing a recommendation to a building operations manager to implement a specific hue state override, (ii) automatically implementing a specific hue state override, or (iii) the like.

In some examples, the recommendations provided to building operations managers and/or facility managers include various information. The recommendation may include an indication of the percentage of building occupants that have provided similar indirect feedback to them for providing the recommendation. Recommendations may include the impact of implementation of a particular state override on other building systems, such as assessed changes in energy savings. Recommendations may include options for the building operations manager to result in a one-time override implementation. The recommendations may include options for the building operations manager to cause automatic overrides of implementations in response to detection of a set of conditions associated with the recommendations. For example, the suggestion is based at least in part on a set of conditions associated with the rule-based pattern. An example of a suggestion would be "57% of the occupants of Conference Room 1 prefer a darker tint level in the afternoon; would you like to implement an override from tint state to tint state 4 at 1 p.m.?" Another example of a suggestion would be " 63% of the occupants of Conference Room 1 prefer warmer temperatures; would you like to brighten the windows in the morning to allow heating from sunlight?" Another example of the suggestion is "Make the windows in Conference Room 1 brighter in the morning Brightening will reduce the energy consumed by the lighting fixtures in Conference Room 1 by 50%; would you like to implement this change?"

In some embodiments, user responses in response to actions identified by the behavioral model are used (i) to update a database used by the behavioral model and/or (ii) to perform additional training of the behavioral model. User responses may include responses to suggestions, such as (i) whether to implement a one-time override, (ii) whether to implement a general override in response to detecting implementation of a set of conditions, (iii) whether to implement an override , and/or (iv) the like. In the case of a user response confirming the action(s), the association between a set of conditions and an indication of the state of the target device in a rules-based mode can be enforced such that in response to detection that the set of conditions has occurred Identify rule-based patterns as having a high probability of matching. Examples of situations where a user response confirms action(s) may include (a) where a one-time override is confirmed in a user response, (b) where a general override is confirmed in a user response, or (c) similar. In cases where the user responds with disagreement to the action(s), the correlation between a set of conditions and the state of the target device indicated in a rule-based mode can be decoupled such that in response to detection that the set of conditions has occurred Instead, rule-based patterns are identified as having a lower likelihood of matching.

21 shows an example of a flowchart for identifying one or more actions in response to receiving indirect feedback. At block 2101, indirect feedback is obtained. Indirect feedback may be associated with one or more controllable devices. Indirect feedback includes user preferences that may not be implemented and/or may not be actionable, for example, resulting from a change in one or more controllable devices that is not permitted by the user providing the indirect feedback. At block 2102, a determination is made whether the indirect feedback matches the rule-based pattern. The determination may be made based at least in part on whether parameters associated with the indirect feedback match parameters associated with the rule-based pattern. At block 2102, if no matching rule-based pattern is identified, the process ends at block 2106. The indirect feedback can be stored, for example, in a database (eg, a database storing comments received through indirect feedback). At block 2102, if a matching rule-based pattern is identified, at block 2103 an action associated with the matched rule-based pattern is implemented. Actions may include automatically adjusting the controllable device to a target state specified in the rule-based mode, providing a recommendation to the building operations manager to implement as a one-time override of the controllable device to the target state specified in the rule-based mode Adjustment of target states in , and/or provide recommendations to building operations managers to implement general overrides to target states specified in the rules-based model. At optional block 2104, one or more user responses to the action(s) may be obtained. The action(s) may include a user response to a suggestion provided (eg, a user response to a suggestion from a building operations manager who received the suggestion). At block 2105, the facility settings are updated. Facility (eg, building) settings may be updated based at least in part on user responses to suggestions. In one example, a user response to a suggestion to perform a general override to a particular target state in response to detection of a particular condition, where the general override is implemented, may update building settings accordingly. For example, scheduling information can be updated based at least in part on user responses. The settings of the facility (eg, devices of the facility) can be used by the control system to implement general overrides in response to detection of the set of conditions. The program then ends at block 2106.

In some embodiments, a behavioral model associated with the plurality of facilities is trained based at least in part on user feedback data from the facilities. A facility can consist of one or more buildings. At least one first facility of a first set of facilities for which an action is identified using the behavioral model is different from at least one second facility of a second set of facilities from which user feedback data was obtained. The user feedback data may be overriding data, direct feedback, and/or indirect feedback, the feedback being associated with the controllable state(s) of the controllable device(s) in the first set of facilities. Items reported by users are associated with information. The information may include temporal information, geographic information, facility information, and/or user information related to the user providing the user feedback. Information about the user may include the user's role within the organization or the like. The time information may include the time the user feedback was provided, the date the user feedback was provided, the time of year the user feedback was provided, or the like. Geographical information may include: geographic coordinates, such as the GPS coordinates of the facility to which the User Feedback is applied, geographic location, such as the city and/or state of the facility to which the User Feedback is applied, one or more devices to which the User Feedback is applied ( For example, geo-facing directions for tintable windows), or similar. Facility information may include: facility type, floor to which user feedback is applied to one or more controllable devices, type of room to which user feedback is applied, or the like.

In some embodiments, a behavioral model applied to a plurality of buildings and/or facilities is trained by clustering user feedback based at least in part on a similarity of parameters associated with the user feedback. User feedback may be clustered based at least in part on (i) time information, (ii) geographic information, (ii) facility information, user information, (iv) weather information, and/or (v) sensor information (eg, , grouped). Weather information may include temperature, cloud cover level, precipitation level, or the like. Sensor information may include data and/or measurements from one or more sensors. User feedback may be clustered such that user feedback associated with office buildings located within a particular latitude and/or longitude range are clustered together. User feedback may be clustered such that user feedback associated with a coworking space with an east-facing window is clustered together. User feedback may be clustered such that user feedback received between specific times of day associated with a large commercial space is clustered together. User feedback may be clustered such that user feedback associated with a single-use office room obtained during sunny conditions is clustered together. User feedback may be clustered based at least in part on user preferences regarding environmental conditions. User feedback may be clustered such that user feedback from users whose preferred environment is within a particular temperature range is clustered together. User feedback may be clustered such that user feedback from users who prefer environments with particular glare control levels are clustered together. User feedback may be clustered such that user feedback from users who prefer environments with particular brightness levels are clustered together. User feedback may be clustered using any suitable combination of parameters and/or any number of parameters. In some embodiments, the same machine learning model is trained on at least two of the clusters of user feedback (eg, for each cluster). In some embodiments, different machine learning models are trained on at least two of the clusters of user feedback (eg, for each cluster). A first machine learning model can be used to predict an action to be taken for a first cluster of parameters (e.g., override tint state, override lighting level, override air conditioning level, etc.), and a second machine learning model can be used to predict The action to take for the second cluster of parameters. The machine learning model can have any suitable type of architecture, such as a deep neural network, convolutional neural network, fully convolutional neural network, regression, or the like (e.g., using any of the artificial intelligence methods disclosed herein) .

In some embodiments, parameters and/or rule-based patterns identified by behavior models associated with multiple facilities are provided to a behavior model associated with a single facility. Parametric and/or rule-based models can be incorporated into behavioral models associated with a single facility. Behavior models associated with a single facility may use transfer learning to incorporate parameters and/or rule-based patterns identified by behavior models associated with multiple facilities (eg, multiple facilities).

22 shows an example of a flowchart for training behavioral models of multiple buildings and/or facilities. At block 2201, user feedback data from a plurality of buildings and/or facilities is obtained. User feedback data may be obtained from a database that receives user feedback from a plurality of buildings and/or facilities. User feedback may include override commands, direct feedback, and/or indirect feedback. User feedback may include applied user feedback and/or unapplied user feedback. At block 2202, the user feedback data is clustered into a plurality of clusters. The user feedback data is clustered based at least in part on a similarity of parameters associated with the user feedback data. Parameters may include time information, geographic information, building and/or facility information, user information, weather information (eg, temperature, cloud cover level, precipitation level, etc.), and/or sensor information (eg, from one or more sensor data and/or measurements). Clustering may be performed by a clustering algorithm, such as K-nearest neighbors, K-means, or the like. At block 2203, a machine learning model is trained for a cluster of the plurality of clusters. Each machine learning model predicts a tone override state for a set of conditions associated with user feedback. A machine learning model may be adapted to user feedback associated with parameters corresponding to the clusters.

In some embodiments, an application executing on a user device communicates with one or more control system components. The application program can be communicatively coupled to one or more control system components via a network. The network may be a network of facilities. An application may be used to effect changes to one or more controllable devices, provide user feedback on the state of one or more controllable devices, receive suggestions for changing the state of one or more controllable devices, and/or the like . Instructions for executing the application may be stored locally on the user device executing the application and/or stored on a remote device (eg, server, cloud service, etc.).

Fig. 23 schematically shows the communication between the application program executing on the user device and the control system components. As depicted, network 2301 interacts with user device 2311 to give user 2319 control over the optical state of one or more switchable windows or other controllable devices under the control of network 2301 . The application facilitates the interaction between the user 2319 and the network 2301. Instructions for executing the software application may be stored on the user device 2311, or the web window controller 2303, or elsewhere (eg, server, cloud-based device, etc.). Applications can be on various devices including user device 2311, web window controller 2303, and facility management system 2305, and/or other hardware including shared hardware (such as hardware used locally in the facility) , or run (or execute) outside of the facility, such as at least partially in the cloud.

In some embodiments, different types of interfaces are used to provide user control over interactive objects (eg, systems, devices, and/or media). Interaction objects can be controlled, for example, using a control interface. The control interface can be local and/or remote. The control interface can communicate through the network. The control system is communicatively coupled to the network, and the target is communicatively coupled to the network. Examples of control interfaces include operating digital twins (eg, representative models) of devices. For example, mobile circuitry may be used to control one or more interactive devices (eg, optically switchable windows, sensors, emitters, and/or media displays). Mobile circuitry may include gaming controllers (eg, pointing devices) or virtual reality (VR) user interfaces. As additional new devices are installed in the facility (eg, in its rooms) and coupled to the network, new targets (eg, devices) can be detected (eg, included in the digital twin). Detection of new objects and/or inclusion of new objects into the digital twin can be done automatically and/or manually. For example, detection of new objects and/or inclusion of new objects into the digital twin may not require (eg, any) manual intervention.

In some embodiments, the digital twin includes a digital model of the facility. A digital twin consists of a virtual three-dimensional (3D) model of a facility. Facilities may include static and/or dynamic elements. For example, static elements may include representations of structural features of a facility, and dynamic elements may include representations of interactive devices with controllable features. A 3D model may include visual elements. Visual elements may represent facility fixtures. Fixtures may include walls, floors, walls, doors, shelving, structural (eg, walk-in) closets, fixed lights, electrical panels, elevator shafts, or windows. Fixtures can be attached to structures. Visual elements can represent non-fixed objects. Non-fixed objects can include people, chairs, movable lights, tables, couches, movable closets, or media projections. Visual elements may represent facility features including floors, walls, doors, windows, furniture, appliances, people, and/or interactive objects. Digital twins can resemble virtual worlds used in computer games and simulations, thereby representing the environment of real facilities. 3D model creation may include analysis of Building Information Modeling (BIM) models (e.g. Autodesk Revit files in *.RVT format) to e.g. derive (e.g. basic) fixed structures such as doors, windows and elevators and movable representation of the item. The 3D model may include architectural details related to the design of the facility, such as 3D models, height details, floor plans, and/or project settings related to the facility. A 3D model may contain annotations (eg, with two-dimensional (2D) drawing elements). The 3D model facilitates retrieval of information from the facility's model database. 3D models can be used to plan and/or track various stages in a facility's lifecycle (eg, facility concept, construction, maintenance, and/or demolition). The 3D model can be updated during the life cycle of the facility. Updates may be performed periodically, intermittently, upon occurrence of an event (eg, related to the structural status of the facility), in real time, as manpower becomes available, and/or on a whim. The digital twin can include a 3D model, and can be updated relative to (eg, when) the 3D model of the facility. The digital twin can be linked to the 3D model (eg, and thus to its updates). Real time can include up to 15 seconds (sec.), 30 sec., 45 sec., 1 minute (min), 2 min., 3 min., 4 min., 5 min., 10 min., 15 min from the time a change occurs in the enclosure .or within 30 min.

In some embodiments, a digital twin (e.g., 3D of a facility) is defined at least in part by using one or more sensors (e.g., optical, acoustic, pressure, gas velocity, and/or distance measuring sensors) model) to determine the layout of real facilities. The use of sensor data may be used exclusively to model the environment of the enclosure. The use of sensor data can be used in conjunction with a 3D model of the facility (e.g., (BIM model) to model the environment of the enclosure. The BIM model of the facility can be obtained before, during, and/or after the facility has been constructed. The BIM model of the facility Can be updated (e.g., manually and/or using sensor data) during operation of the facility (e.g., in real time). Real-time can include during changes to or in the facility. Real-time can include changes from the facility Or within at most 2h, 4h, 6h, 8h, 12h, 24h, 36h, 48h, 60h or 72h from the change in the facility.

In some embodiments, dynamic elements in a digital twin include target (eg, device) settings. Target settings may include (eg, existing and/or predetermined): tint values, temperature settings, and/or light switch settings. Goal settings may include actions available in the media display. Available actions may include menu items or hotspots in the displayed content. The digital twin may include virtual representations of objects and/or movable objects (eg, chairs or doors) and/or occupants (either from a camera or from actual images stored as avatars). In some embodiments, a dynamic element may be a target (eg, a device) that is newly connected to the network and/or disappears from the network (eg, due to failure or relocation). A digital twin can reside in any circuitry (eg, a processor) operatively coupled to a network. The circuitry in which the digital circuitry resides may be in the facility, off-site, and/or in the cloud. In some embodiments, a bi-directional link is maintained between the digital twin and the real circuitry. The actual circuitry may be part of the control system. The real circuitry may be included in the master controller, network controller, floor controller, local controller, or any other node in the processing system (eg, in the facility or outside the facility). For example, bi-directional links can be used by real circuits to inform the digital twin of changes in dynamic and/or static elements so that a 3D representation of an enclosure can be updated, for example, in real time. Real time may include during changes to or within an enclosure. Real time can include up to 15 seconds (sec.), 30 sec., 45 sec., 1 minute (min), 2 min., 3 min. Within 4min., 5min., 10min., 15min. or 30min. The two-way link can be used by the digital twin to inform the real circuitry of manipulation (eg, control) actions entered by the user on the mobile circuitry. The mobile circuitry may be a remote controller (eg, including a handheld pointer, manual input buttons, or a touch screen).

In some embodiments, one or more mobile circuit devices of the user are aligned with (e.g., linked to) a virtual 3D "digital twin" model of the facility (or any portion thereof), such as via a WiFi or other network connection. ). The mobile circuit may include a remote (eg, mobile) control interface. Action circuits may include pointers, game controllers, and/or virtual reality (VR) controllers. For example, the mobile circuit may have no interaction with the physical device other than to forward network communications to and/or from the digital twin via the aligned communication channel. User interaction with any device controlled within the enclosure may not be direct and/or physical. User interaction with a target may be indirect. User interaction with objects may not have haptic touch, optical ray projection, and/or sound. The control action taken by the user to control the object may be based at least in part on the relative position of the digital circuitry manipulated by the user relative to the modeled space in the digital twin (eg, virtual movement within the modeled enclosure). Control actions taken by a user to control a target may not be based on (eg, and ignore) the spatial relationship between the user and the digital twin. For example, a user may use a remote control pointing device and point to the presentation portion. The presentation may be displayed on a TOLED display structure placed in line of sight between the user and the window (eg, a smart window). The coupling between the action circuit and the target may be time-based and/or may be action-based. For example, a user may use a remote controller to point at a presentation and thereby couple to the presentation. Coupling may be initiated upon pointing for a duration exceeding one of the duration thresholds. Coupling can be initiated by clicking on the remote controller while pointing. The user can then point to the location that triggers the drop-down menu in the presentation. (i) when pointing may exceed a time threshold, (ii) when the user presses a button on the remote controller (e.g., motion-based), and/or (iii) when the user performs a gesture ( For example, as disclosed herein), a drop-down menu may be visible. The user can then make a selection from the menu. (i) when pointing may exceed a time threshold, (ii) when the user presses a button on the remote controller (e.g., motion-based), and/or (iii) when the user performs a gesture ( For example, as disclosed herein), selection can be initiated. Actions of the user in conjunction with the action circuit (eg, remote controller) can be communicated to the network and thereby to the digital twin, which in turn is communicated to the target. And thus, the user can communicate indirectly with the target through the digital twin. The action circuit (eg, remote controller) can be positioned relative to the enclosure one at a time, at time intervals, and/or continuously. Once the relative location of the action circuit (eg, the remote controller) and the enclosure has been determined, the user can use the remote controller in any position (eg, inside the enclosure, or outside the enclosure). The enclosure exterior may be contained within the facility or external to the facility. For example, a conference room can determine its relative location to a remote controller. Thereafter, the user can use the relatively positioned remote controller to manipulate the light intensity of the bulbs placed in the conference room when located in the conference room or when located outside the conference room (eg, at home).

In some embodiments, a mobile circuit (e.g., a remote controller) may control (e.g., any) interaction in a facility or any portion thereof and/or may control an object (e.g., a device) so long as (i) the object and ( ii) It is sufficient that the mobile circuit (eg, a remote controller) is communicatively coupled to the digital twin (eg, using a network). For example, a facility may include interactive objects that include one or more sensors, emitters, tintable windows, or media displays that are coupled to a communication network. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the digital twin from a (eg, arbitrary) location within the facility or from outside the facility. For example, remote controller devices may include virtual reality (VR) devices, such as with headsets (e.g., binocular displays) and/or handheld controllers (e.g., motion sensors with or without input buttons) . The mobile circuit may include an Oculus virtual reality player controller (OVRPlayerController). In some embodiments, a remote control interface may be used that provides (i) a visual representation of the user to the digital twin for navigating through the virtual facility, and/or (ii) user input actions for to move within the 3D model. User input actions may include (1) pointing at the desired interactive object to be controlled (e.g., to change the state of the object), (2) gestures, and/or (3) button presses to indicate that the desired interaction object is to be controlled by the action circuit (e.g., to change the state of the object). remote controller) to choose the action to take. The remote controller can be used to interact by pointing at an object (e.g., for coupling), making gestures in other directions, and/or pressing one or more buttons operatively coupled to the action circuit (e.g., for buttons placed on the enclosure of the mobile circuit) to manipulate interactive objects. The interface between the mobile circuit and the digital twin may not be through the screen depicting the digital twin. The interface between the user and the digital twin may not be through the screen displaying the digital twin. The interface between the mobile circuit and the digital model may not require (eg, any) optical sensors as aids. Some embodiments employ different modes of input from an augmented reality application that operates by interacting with the screen (eg, by using an optical sensor such as a camera).

In some embodiments, a mobile circuit (eg, a handheld controller) is used that does not have any display or screen that can depict digital representations of enclosures and/or objects. For example, instead of a virtual tour by the user within the enclosure, the actual location of the user can be determined in order to determine the user's position in the digital twin, eg, to be used as a reference in relation to pointing actions performed by the user. For example, the mobile circuit (e.g., a hand-held controller) can include geographic tracking capabilities (e.g., GPS, UWB, BLE, and/or dead reckoning) so that a user-established relationship between the mobile circuit and the digital twin can be used. Any suitable network connection transmits the location coordinates of the mobile circuit to the digital twin. For example, a network connection may comprise, at least in part, a transport link used by a hierarchical network of controllers within a facility. The network connection may be separate from the facility's controller network (eg, using a wireless network such as a cellular network).

In some embodiments, a user may couple to the requested object. Coupling may include gestures using mobile circuits. Coupling may include electronic triggering in motion circuits. Coupling may include moving, pointing, clicking gestures, or any combination thereof. For example, coupling may be initiated at least in part by pointing at the target for a time period above a threshold (eg, predetermined). For example, coupling can be initiated at least in part by clicking a button (eg, a target selection button) on a remote controller that includes motion circuitry. For example, coupling can be initiated at least in part by moving the action circuit in the direction of the target. For example, the coupling may be achieved at least in part by pointing the front portion of the action circuit in the direction of the target (e.g., for a time above a first threshold) and clicking a button (e.g., for a time above a second threshold). time) to start. The first threshold and the second threshold may be (eg, substantially) the same or different.

Figure 24 shows an example embodiment of a control system where a real physical enclosure (eg, room) 2400 includes a network of controllers for managing interactive network devices under the control of a processor 2401 (eg, a master controller). The structure and contents of the building 2400 are represented in a 3-D model digital twin 2402 as part of a modeling and/or simulation system executed in a computing asset. Computing assets may be co-located with enclosure 2400 and processor (eg, main controller) 2401 or remote therefrom. Network link 2403 in enclosure 2400 connects processor 2401 with a plurality of network nodes including interactive objects 2405 . Interaction target 2405 is represented as virtual object 2406 within digital twin 2402 . The network link 2404 connects the processor 2401 and the digital twin 2402 .

In the example of FIG. 24 , a user located in enclosure 2400 carries handheld control 2407 with pointing capability (eg, to couple with target 2405 ). The location of handheld control 2407 can be tracked, for example, via a network link (not shown) with digital twin 2402 . Links may include some of the transmission media contained within network 2403. Handheld controller 2407 is represented as virtual handheld controller 2408 within digital twin 2402 . Based at least in part on the tracked position and pointing capabilities of the handheld controller 2407, when the user initiates a pointing event (e.g., aiming at a particular target and pressing an action button on the handheld controller), it is transmitted to the digital twin 2402. Accordingly, the digital twin 2402 interacts with a target (eg, represented as a digital ray 2409 from a tracked location within the digital twin 2402 ). Digital ray 2409 intersects virtual device 2406 at intersection point 2410 . Resulting interpretations of actions taken by the user in digital twin 2402 are reported via digital twin 2402 to processor 2401 via network link 2404 . In response, the processor 2401 forwards control messages to the interaction device 2405 to initiate command actions based on gestures (or other input actions) made by the user.

In some embodiments, a user may be located in an enclosure (eg, a facility such as a building). One or more sensors may be used to locate the user. User can carry tags. Tags may include radio frequency identification (eg, RFID) technology (eg, transceiver), Bluetooth technology, and/or global positioning system (GPS) technology. The radio frequency may include an ultra-wideband radio frequency. The tags may be sensed by one or more sensors disposed in the enclosure. The sensor(s) may be placed in a collection of devices. A device set may include sensors or emitters. The sensor(s) may be operably (eg, communicatively) coupled to the network. The network may have, for example, low-latency communication within an enclosure. Radio waves (eg, emitted and/or sensed by tags) may include broadband or ultra-wideband radio signals. Radio waves may include pulsed radio waves. Radio waves may include radio waves used in communications. The radio waves may be at an intermediate frequency of at least about 300 kilohertz (KHz), 500 KHz, 800 KHz, 1000 KHz, 1500 KHz, 2000 KHz, or 2500 KHz. Radio waves may be at intermediate frequencies up to about 500 KHz, 800 KHz, 1000 KHz, 1500 KHz, 2000 KHz, 2500 KHz, or 3000 KHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the foregoing frequency ranges (eg, about 300 KHz to about 3000 KHz). Radio waves may be at a high frequency of at least about 3 megahertz (MHz), 5 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, or 25 MHz. Radio waves can be at high frequencies up to about 5 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, 25 MHz or 30 MHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the foregoing frequency ranges (eg, from about 3 MHz to about 30 MHz). Radio waves can be at very high frequencies of at least about 30 megahertz (MHz), 50 MHz, 80 MHz, 100 MHz, 150 MHz, 200 MHz, or 250 MHz. Radio waves can be at very high frequencies up to about 50 MHz, 80 MHz, 100 MHz, 150 MHz, 200 MHz, 250 MHz or 300 MHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (eg, from about 30 MHz to about 300 MHz). The radio waves can be at ultrahigh frequencies of at least about 300 kilohertz (MHz), 500 MHz, 800 MHz, 1000 MHz, 1500 MHz, 2000 MHz, or 2500 MHz. Radio waves can be at ultra high frequencies up to about 500 MHz, 800 MHz, 1000 MHz, 1500 MHz, 2000 MHz, 2500 MHz or 3000 MHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the foregoing frequency ranges (eg, from about 300 MHz to about 3000 MHz). The radio waves can be at ultrahigh frequencies of at least about 3 gigahertz (GHz), 5 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 15 GHz, 20 GHz, or 25 GHz. Radio waves may be at ultrahigh frequencies up to about 5 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 15 GHz, 20 GHz, 25 GHz, or 30 GHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (eg, from about 3 GHz to about 30 GHz).

In some embodiments, the occupant identification tag includes a location device. Location devices (also referred to herein as "location devices") may damage radio transmitters and/or receivers (eg, wideband or ultra-wideband radio transmitters and/or receivers). The positioning device may include a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. The positioning device may include a Bluetooth device. The positioning device may include radio wave transmitters and/or receivers. Radio waves may include broadband or ultra-wideband radio signals. Radio waves may include pulsed radio waves. Radio waves may include radio waves used in communications. The radio waves may be at an intermediate frequency of at least about 300 kilohertz (KHz), 500 KHz, 800 KHz, 1000 KHz, 1500 KHz, 2000 KHz, or 2500 KHz. Radio waves may be at intermediate frequencies up to about 500 KHz, 800 KHz, 1000 KHz, 1500 KHz, 2000 KHz, 2500 KHz, or 3000 KHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the foregoing frequency ranges (eg, about 300 KHz to about 3000 KHz). Radio waves may be at a high frequency of at least about 3 megahertz (MHz), 5 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, or 25 MHz. Radio waves can be at high frequencies up to about 5 MHz, 8 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, 25 MHz or 30 MHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the foregoing frequency ranges (eg, from about 3 MHz to about 30 MHz). Radio waves can be at very high frequencies of at least about 30 megahertz (MHz), 50 MHz, 80 MHz, 100 MHz, 150 MHz, 200 MHz, or 250 MHz. Radio waves can be at very high frequencies up to about 50 MHz, 80 MHz, 100 MHz, 150 MHz, 200 MHz, 250 MHz or 300 MHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (eg, from about 30 MHz to about 300 MHz). The radio waves can be at ultrahigh frequencies of at least about 300 kilohertz (MHz), 500 MHz, 800 MHz, 1000 MHz, 1500 MHz, 2000 MHz, or 2500 MHz. Radio waves can be at ultra high frequencies up to about 500 MHz, 800 MHz, 1000 MHz, 1500 MHz, 2000 MHz, 2500 MHz or 3000 MHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the foregoing frequency ranges (eg, from about 300 MHz to about 3000 MHz). The radio waves can be at ultrahigh frequencies of at least about 3 gigahertz (GHz), 5 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 15 GHz, 20 GHz, or 25 GHz. Radio waves may be at ultrahigh frequencies up to about 5 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 15 GHz, 20 GHz, 25 GHz, or 30 GHz. The radio waves may be at any frequency between the aforementioned frequency ranges (eg, from about 3 GHz to about 30 GHz).

In some embodiments, the positioning device facilitates positioning within a margin of error. The margin of error of the positioning device may be up to about 5 meters (m), 4 m, 3 m, 2 m, 1 m, 0.5 m, 0.4 m, 0.3 m, 0.2 m, 0.1 m, or 0.05 m. The error range of the positioning device can be any value between the foregoing values (e.g., from about 5 m to about 0.05 m, from about 5 m to about 1 m, from about 1 m to about 0.3 m, and from about 0.3 m to about 0.05m). The margin of error can indicate the accuracy of the positioning device.

In some embodiments, the target device (eg, service device) may be discovered within a range of the user (eg, using a network and control system). In some embodiments, a target device (eg, a service device) may be discovered within a range of the target device. User scope and device scope are intersectable. A scope may be referred to herein as a "discovery scope," such as a serving device discovery scope. When the target device discovery range intersects the user discovery range, the user can discover the target device. For example, a user may discover a target device when the user is within the target device discovery range. Discovery can be performed using a network. This discovery can be displayed in the user's mobile circuit (eg, cellular phone). A scope can be specific to a target device, a target device type, or a collection of target device types. For example, a first scope may be for manufacturing machines, a second scope may be for media displays, and a third scope may be for food service machines. A scope can be specific to an enclosure or a portion of an enclosure. For example, a first discovery scope may be for a lobby, a second discovery scope may be for a cafeteria, and a third discovery scope may be for an office or group of offices. The scope may be fixed or adjustable (eg, by users, managers, facility owners, and/or lessors). The first target device type may have a different discovery range than the second target device type. For example, a larger control range may be assigned for a light switch and a shorter control range for a beverage service device. Larger control ranges may have up to about 1 meter (m), 2 m, 3 m or 5 m. Shorter control ranges may have up to about 0.2 m, 0.3 m, 0.4 m, 0.5 m, 0.6 m, 0.7 m, 0.8 m or 0.9 m. A user may detect (eg, visually and/or use a list) devices that are within the user's associated usage range. Visually may include icons using enclosures, drawings, and/or digital twins (eg, as disclosed herein). The use of discovery scopes may, for example, facilitate focusing (e.g., shortening) the list of relevant target devices controlled by the user, and prevent the user from having to navigate through a long list of (e.g., largely irrelevant) target devices (e.g., service devices) Make a selection. The scope of control may be using the user's location (for example, using a geolocation device such as includes UWB technology), and target device pairing to the network (for example, Wi-Fi pairing). The discovery range is not limited by the range indicated by direct device-user pairing techniques (eg, Bluetooth pairing range). For example, when the user is located away from the target device, the user may still be able to couple with the target device even if the device is out of direct device-user pairing technical range (eg, user range). A third-party target device selected by the user may or may not incorporate technology for direct device-user pairing techniques.

In some embodiments, pulse-based ultra-wideband (UWB) technology (such as ECMA-368 or ECMA-369) is used for short distances (such as up to about 300 feet ('), 250', 230', 200' or Wireless technology that transmits large amounts of data at low power (eg, less than approximately 1 millivolt (mW), 0.75 mW, 0.5 mW, or 0.25 mW) within 150'). UWB signals may occupy at least about 750 MHz, 500 MHz, or 250 MHz of the bandwidth spectrum, and/or at least about 30%, 20%, or 10% of its center frequency. UWB signals can be transmitted by one or more pulses. A component that broadcasts digital signal pulses to simultaneously time (eg precisely) a carrier signal across several channels. Information may be transmitted, for example, by modulating the timing and/or positioning of signals (eg, pulses). Signal information can be transmitted by encoding the polarity of the signal (eg pulse), its amplitude and/or by using quadrature signals (eg pulse). UWB signals may be a low power information transfer protocol. UWB technology can be used for (eg indoor) positioning applications. The broad UWB spectral range includes low frequencies with long wavelengths, which allows UWB signals to penetrate a variety of materials, including various building fixtures (eg walls). A wide frequency range (eg, including low penetration frequencies) may reduce the chance of multipath propagation errors (without wishing to be bound by theory, since some wavelengths may have line-of-sight trajectories). UWB communication signals (e.g., pulses) can be short (e.g., up to about 70 cm, 60 cm, or 50 cm for pulses about 600 MHz, 500 MHz, or 400 MHz wide; or for pulses with about 1 GHz, 1.2 GHz, 1.3 GHz, or 1.5 GHz pulses up to about 20 cm, 23 cm, 25 cm, or 30 cm). Short communication signals (eg, pulses) reduce the chance that reflected signals (eg, pulses) will overlap the original signal (eg, pulses).

In some embodiments, the user's identification (ID) tag may include a microchip. The microchip can be a micropositioning chip. Microchips may incorporate automated positioning technology (also referred to herein as "micropositioning chips"). Microchips may incorporate technology for automatic reporting of high-resolution and/or high-accuracy location information. Automatic location technology can include GPS, Bluetooth or radio wave technology. Auto-location techniques may include electromagnetic wave (eg, radio wave) emission and/or detection. The radio wave technology may be any RF technology disclosed herein (eg, high frequency, ultra high frequency, ultra high frequency). Radio wave technology may include UWB technology. A microchip can help determine its location to within an accuracy of up to about 25 centimeters, 20 cm, 15 cm, 10 cm, or 5 cm. In various embodiments, the control system, sensors and/or antennas are configured to communicate with the micro-location chip. In some embodiments, the ID tag may include a micropositioning wafer. A micropositioning chip can be configured to broadcast one or more signals. The signal may be an omnidirectional signal. One or more components operatively coupled to the network may, for example, each include a micropositioning chip. A micropositioning wafer (eg, placed in a static and/or known position) can act as an anchor. By analyzing the time it takes for the broadcast signal to reach the anchor within the transmittable distance of the ID tag, the location of the ID tag can be determined. One or more processors (eg of a control system) may perform analysis of position-related signals. For example, a relative distance between a microchip and one or more anchors and/or other microchips (eg, within transmission range limits) can be determined. Relative distances, known positions, and/or anchor information may be aggregated. At least one of the anchors may be placed in a floor, ceiling, wall and/or mullion of a building. There may be at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8 or 10 anchors disposed in an enclosure (eg, in a room, in a building and/or in a facility). At least two of the anchors may have (eg substantially) the same at least one of X, Y and Z coordinates (of a Cartesian coordinate system).

In some embodiments, the window control system enables location and/or tracking of one or more devices (eg, including automated location technology such as a microlocation chip) and/or at least one user carrying such a device. The relative position between two or more such devices may be determined from information related to received transmissions at, for example, one or more antennas and/or sensors. The location of a device may include geolocation and/or geographic location. The location of the device may be an analysis of electromagnetic signals emitted from the device and/or the micropositioning chip. Information that can be used to determine location includes, for example, received signal strength, time of arrival, signal frequency, and/or angle of arrival. When determining the location of one or more components from these measurements, a positioning (eg, using trilateration such as triangulation) module may be implemented. Positioning modules may include calculations and/or algorithms. Automatic targeting may include geographic location and/or geolocation. An example of a positioning method can be found in International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US17/31106, filed May 4, 2017, entitled "WINDOW ANTENNAS", which is incorporated by reference in its entirety way incorporated into this article.

In some embodiments, one or more position sensors may be used to locate the user's position. Position sensors may be placed in an enclosure such as a facility, building, or room. The position sensor may be part of a sensor ensemble or separate from the sensor ensemble (eg, a stand-alone position sensor). The location sensor is operatively (eg, communicatively) coupled to the network. A network may be a network of facilities (eg, of buildings). Networks can be configured to carry communications and power. The network can be any of the networks disclosed herein. A network may extend to a room, floor, rooms, floors, building, or buildings of a facility. Networks are operably (e.g., to facilitate power and/or communication) coupled to control systems (e.g., as disclosed herein), sensors, emitters, antennas, routers, power supplies, building management system (and/or its components). The network may be coupled to personal computers of users (eg, employees and/or tenants) (eg, occupants) associated with the facility. At least part of the network may be installed as an initial network of the facility and/or placed in an enclosure structure of the facility. A user may or may not be present in the facility. The user's personal computer can be located away from the facility. The network is operatively coupled to other devices in the facility that perform operations for or associated with the facility (eg, production machinery, communication machinery, and/or service machinery). Production machinery may include computers, factory-related machinery, and/or any other machinery configured to produce products (for example, printers and/or dispensers). Service machinery may include food and/or beverage related machinery, sanitation related machinery (eg mask dispensers and/or sanitizer dispensers). Communication machinery may include media projectors, media displays, touch screens, speakers, and/or luminaires (eg, entry, exit, and/or security luminaires).

In some embodiments, a user's location within an enclosure (eg, a facility comprising a building, room, or the like) is used in connection with user feedback regarding one or more devices associated with the enclosure. One or more devices may be identified based at least in part on the user's location. The one or more devices may be identified as proximate to the detected and/or identified location of the user within the enclosure. For example, where user feedback is received regarding the current temperature within the enclosure, the current light level within the enclosure, etc.; state change), one or more controllable devices that modify the atmosphere and/or state of the enclosure based on received user feedback (e.g., one or more tintable windows, one or more HVAC units, components, or similar By). A change in state of one or more controllable devices identified based at least in part on the identified and/or detected location of the user may be determined based at least in part on one or more machine learning models. A machine learning model can be an instructional model and/or a behavioral model. Behavioral models may include models that learn user preferences based on direct and/or indirect user feedback. Instructive models may include models utilizing sensor data, schedule information, weather information, explicit user preferences, and/or any suitable combination thereof.

In some embodiments, at least one device collectively includes at least one processor and/or memory. The processor can perform computing tasks (including, for example, machine learning and/or artificial intelligence related tasks). In this way, the network can allow for low latency (eg, as disclosed herein) and faster response times for applications and/or commands. In some embodiments, the network and circuits coupled thereto may form a distributed computing environment (including, for example, CPU, memory, and storage) for application and/or service hosting to store and/or Or process content close to the user's mobile circuitry (for example, a cellular device, pad, or laptop).

In some embodiments, a network is coupled to a collective of devices. The device collective may perform (e.g., in real-time) sensing and/or tracking (e.g., in situ) of an occupant in an enclosure in which the device collective is housed, such as (i) to enable the user's mobile circuit to network seamless connectivity of roads and/or adjust network-coupled mechanical devices according to user requirements and/or preferences, (ii) to identify users (for example, using facial recognition, voice recognition and/or identification tags ), and/or (iii) to tailor the environment of the enclosure to any preferences of the user. For example, when a meeting organizer enters an assigned meeting room, the organizer may be identified by one or more sensors (e.g., using facial recognition and/or ID tags), and the organizer's presence may appear on a screen in the meeting room and and/or on the invitee's processor screen. The screen can be controlled (eg, remotely by the organizer or invitees, eg, as disclosed herein). Invitees can be in the meeting room, or remotely. Organizers can connect to assistants via the Internet. Assistants can be real or virtual (eg, digital office assistants). The organizer can make one or more requests to the assistant, which can be fulfilled by the assistant. Requests may require the use of a network for communication and/or control. For example, a request may be to retrieve a file and/or manipulate a file (eg, during a meeting). A request can be a change to a function controlled by a control system (eg, dimming lights, cooling a room environment, sounding an alarm, closing a facility door, and/or stopping operation of plant machinery). Assistants (eg, digital assistants) can take notes (eg, using voice recognition), schedule meetings, and/or update files during meetings. The assistant can analyze (eg, read) the email and/or reply. An occupant can interact with the assistant in a contactless (eg, remote) manner, eg, using gestures and/or voice interaction (eg, as disclosed herein).

25 shows an example of a building with a collective of devices (eg, assembly, also referred to herein as a "digital architecture element"). As connection points, the building may include a plurality of rooftop donor antennas 2505, 2505b and a sky sensor 2507 for transmitting electromagnetic radiation (eg, infrared, ultraviolet, radio frequency, and/or visible light). These wireless signals may allow the building service network to wirelessly interface with one or more communication service provider systems. The building has a control panel 2513 for connection to the provider's central office 2511 via physical line 2509 (eg, optical fiber such as single mode fiber). The control panel 2513 may include hardware and/or software configured to provide, for example, the functions of a signal source carrier head, a fiber distribution head, and/or (eg, bi-directional) amplifiers or repeaters. Rooftop donor antennas 2505a and 2505b may allow building occupants and/or devices to access the (eg, 3rd party) provider's wireless system communication services. Antennas and/or controllers may provide access to the same service provider system, different service provider systems, or some variation, such as two interface elements providing access to a first service provider's system, and different interface The component provides access to the system of the second service provider.

As shown in the example of FIG. 25, the vertical data plane may include (eg, high capacity or high speed) data carrying wires 2519, such as (eg, single mode) optical fiber or (full gauge) UTP copper wire. In some embodiments, at least one control panel may be disposed on at least some of the floors of the building (eg, on each floor). In some embodiments, one (eg, high capacity) communication line may directly connect the control panel in the top floor to the (eg, main) control panel 2513 in the bottom floor (or in the basement level). It should be noted that in the example shown in Figure 25, the control panel 2517 is directly connected to the rooftop antennas 2505a, 2505b and/or the sky sensor 2507, while the control panel 2513 is directly connected to the (e.g., 3rd party) service provider central office 2511.

FIG. 25 shows an example of a horizontal data plane that may include one or more of a control panel and data-carrying wiring (eg, lines) including trunk lines 2521 . In some embodiments, the trunks comprise (eg, are made of) coaxial cables. The trunk lines may include any of the wiring disclosed herein. The control panel can be configured to provide data over trunk 2521 via a data communication protocol such as MoCA and/or d.hn. Data communication protocols may include (i) Next Generation Native Networking Protocol (abbreviated herein as "G.hn" protocol), (ii) communication of digital information over power lines traditionally used (for example, only) to deliver electricity technology, or (iii) hardware devices designed to communicate and transfer data over a building's electrical wiring (for example, Ethernet, USB, and Wi-Fi). The data transfer protocol can facilitate a data transfer rate of at least about 1 gigabit/second (Gbit/s), 2 Gbit/s, 3 Gbit/s, 4 Gbit/s, or 5 Gbit/s. Data transfer protocols may operate over telephone wiring, coaxial cables, power lines, and/or (eg, plastic) optical fibers. Chips (eg, including semiconductor devices) can be used to facilitate data transfer protocols. At least one (e.g., each) horizontal data plane may provide support for one or more device collectives (such as 2523) (e.g., a collection of one or more devices in a housing containing an assembly of devices) and/or an antenna ( For example, 2525), some or all of these antennas are optionally collectively integrated with the device. Antennas (and associated radios, not shown) can be configured to provide wireless access via any of a variety of protocols, including, for example, cellular (e.g., at or near 28 GHz one or more frequency band), Wi-Fi (eg, in one or more of the 2.4, 5, and 60 GHz frequency bands), CBRS, etc. A drop line may connect a collective of devices (eg, 2523) to a trunk line (eg, 2521). In some embodiments, horizontal data planes are deployed on floors of buildings. Devices in a device population may include sensors, emitters, or antennas. A collective of devices may include circuitry. The devices in the device set are operably coupled to the circuitry. A circuit may include a processor. The circuit can be operatively coupled to a memory and/or a communication hub (eg, Ethernet and/or cellular). One or more donor antennae (eg, 2505a, 2505b) may be connected to the control panel (eg, 2513) via high speed lines (eg, single mode fiber or copper). In the depicted example of Figure 25, the control panel 2513 is located in the lower floor of the building. The connection to the donor antenna may be through one or more vRAN radios and wiring (eg, coax).

In the example shown in Figure 25, the communication service provider central office 2511 is connected to the ground floor control panel 2513 via a high speed line 2509 (eg, fiber optics serving as part of the backhaul). This point of entry for the service provider to the building is sometimes referred to as the main point of entry (MPOE), and it can be configured to allow the building to distribute both voice and data traffic.

In some cases, small cell systems are available to buildings at least in part via one or more antennas. Examples of antennas, sky sensors, and control systems can be found in the invention titled "MULTI-SENSOR DEVICE AND SYSTEM WITH A LIGHT DIFFUSING ELEMENT AROUND A PERIPHERY OF A RING OF PHOTOSENSORS AND AN INFRARED SENSOR" filed on October 6, 2016 in U.S. Patent Application No. 15/287,646, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In some embodiments, the target device is operatively coupled to a network. A network is operatively (eg, communicatively) coupled to one or more controllers. A network is operatively (eg, communicatively) coupled to one or more processors. The coupling of the target device to the network may allow the user to communicate contactlessly with the target device using the user's mobile circuit (eg, through a software application installed on the mobile circuit). In this way, the user does not need to directly communicatively couple and decouple the serving device (eg, using Bluetooth technology). A user may be communicatively coupled to multiple target devices simultaneously (eg, in parallel) by coupling the target device to a network to which the user is communicatively coupled (eg, through the user's mobile circuit). The user can sequentially control at least two of the plurality of target devices. A user may control at least two of the plurality of target devices simultaneously (eg, in parallel). For example, a user may open (eg, and run) two applications of two different target devices on his mobile circuit, eg, for control (eg, manipulation).

In some examples, user discovery of target devices is not limited by scope. User discovery of targeted equipment may be restricted by at least one security agreement (eg, hazardous manufacturing machinery may be restricted to authorized manufacturing personnel). A security agreement can have one or more security levels. A user's discovery of a target device may be limited by the devices in the room, floor, building, or facility in which the user is located. A user can change at least one (eg, any) of the range constraints and select a target device from all available target devices.

In some embodiments, the target device is communicatively coupled to the network. The target device may utilize a network authentication protocol. The network authentication protocol may open one or more ports for network access. Ports may be opened when an organization and/or facility authenticates (eg, through network authentication) the identity of a target device attempting to operatively couple (and/or physically couple) to a network. Operably coupled may include communicatively coupled. Organizations and/or facilities may authorize (eg, use the network) target devices' access to the network. Access may or may not be restricted. Restrictions can contain one or more security levels. The identity of the target device can be determined based on authentication and/or credentials. Credentials and/or certificates may be validated by a network (eg, by a server operatively coupled to the network). Authentication protocols may or may not be specific to entity communication (eg, Ethernet communication), eg, in an area network (LAN) utilizing packets. Standards may be maintained by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). Standards may specify operational characteristics of physical media (eg, target devices) and/or networks (eg, Ethernet). Networking standards may support virtual LANs (VLANs) on local (eg, Ethernet) networks. Standards may support power over local area networks such as Ethernet. A network may provide communication over power lines (eg, coaxial cables). The electrical power may be direct current (DC) electrical power. The power may be at least about 12 watts (W), 15 W, 25 W, 30 W, 40 W, 48 W, 50 W, or 100 W. Standards facilitate mesh networking. Standards facilitate local area network (LAN) technology and/or wide area network (WAN) applications. Standards may facilitate physical connections between target devices and/or infrastructure devices (hubs, switches, routers) over various types of cables (eg, coaxial, twisted pair, copper cables, and/or fiber optic cables). Examples of network authentication protocols may be 802.1X or KERBEROS. The network authentication protocol may involve secret key cryptography. The network may support (eg, communications) protocols including 802.3, 802.3af (PoE), 802.3at (PoE+), 802.1Q, or 802.11s. The network may support communication protocols for building automation and control (BAC) networks such as BACnet. A protocol may define services used to communicate between building devices. Protocol services may include device and object discovery (eg, Who-Is, I-Am, Who-Has, and/or I-Have). Protocol services may include read properties and write properties (eg, for data sharing). An Internet protocol may define the type of object (eg, the service acts upon). Protocols may define one or more data link/physical layers (e.g. ARCNET, Ethernet, BACnet/IP, BACnet/IPv6, BACnet/MSTP, point-to-point via RS-232, master-slave/token via RS-485 Pass, Zigbee and/or LonTalk). Protocols may be specific to devices such as Internet of Things (IoT) devices and/or machine-to-machine (M2M) communications). The agreement may be a subpoena agreement. The agreement may be a publish-subscribe agreement. Protocols can be configured for messaging delivery. Protocols can be configured for remote devices. The protocol can be configured for devices with a smaller code footprint and/or minimal network bandwidth. A smaller code footprint can be configured to be processed by a microcontroller. An agreement may have a plurality of QoS levels, including (i) at most once, (ii) at least once, and/or (iii) exactly once. Multiple quality of service levels can improve the reliability of message delivery (eg, to its destination) in the network. Protocols can facilitate (i) device-to-cloud and/or (ii) cloud-to-device communication. The messaging protocol is configured for broadcasting messages to groups of targets such as target devices (eg, devices), sensors, and/or emitters. The protocol may conform to the Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Standards (OASIS). The protocol can support security schemes such as authentication (eg, using tokens). Protocols may support access delegation standards (eg, OAuth). A protocol may support granting a first application (and/or website) access to information on a second application (and/or website) without providing the second application with security code associated with the first application (e.g. , tokens and/or passwords). The protocol may be a Message Queuing Telemetry Transport (MQTT) or an Advanced Message Queuing Protocol (AMQP) protocol. The protocol can be configured for a message rate of at least one (1) message per publisher per second. The protocol can be configured to facilitate message payload sizes of up to 64, 86, 96 or 128 bytes. The protocol can be configured to communicate (eg, from a microcontroller to a server) with any device operating a protocol-compliant (eg, MQTT) library and/or connected to a compliant broker (eg, an MQTT broker) over a network. Each device (eg, target device, sensor, or emitter) can be a publisher and/or a user. Agents can handle millions of concurrently connected devices, or less than millions of concurrently connected devices. The proxy can handle at least about 100, 10,000, 100,000, 1,000,000, or 10,000,000 concurrently connected devices. In some embodiments, a proxy is responsible for receiving (eg, all) messages, filtering messages, determining who is interested in each message, and/or sending messages to such subscribing devices (eg, proxy clients). Protocols may require Internet connectivity to the network. Protocols may facilitate two-way and/or simultaneous peer-to-peer communication. The protocol may be a binary wire protocol. Examples of such network protocols, control systems, and networks can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/000,342, filed March 26, 2020, and entitled "MESSAGING IN A MULTI CLIENT NETWORK," which is The case is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

Examples of network security, communication standards, communication interfaces, messaging, device-to-network coupling, and control can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/000,342 and title of the invention filed on June 04, 2020 International Patent Application No. PCT/US20/70123 for "SECURE BUILDING SERVICES NETWORK," each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In some embodiments, the network allows the target device to couple to the network. Networking (e.g., using a controller and/or processor) to enable target devices to join the network, authenticate target devices, monitor network activity (e.g., with respect to target devices), facilitate performance maintenance and/or diagnostics, And ensure the information transmitted through the Internet. Security levels may allow two-way or one-way communication between the user and the target device. For example, the network may only allow one-way communication from the user to the target device. For example, the network may restrict the availability of data communicated over the network and/or coupled to the network from being accessed by third party owners of the target device (eg, service device). For example, the network may restrict the availability of data communicated over the network and/or coupled to the network from being accessed by organizations and/or facilities and third-party owners and/or manufacturers of targeted devices (e.g., service devices) business-related information.

In some embodiments, the control system is operatively coupled to the learning module. A learning module may utilize, for example, a learning solution that includes artificial intelligence. A learning module may learn one or more user preferences associated with a facility. Users associated with a Facility may include occupants of the Facility, and/or users associated with an entity that resides and/or owns the Facility (eg, employees of a company residing at the Facility). A learning module can analyze the preferences of a user or user group. A learning module may collect user preferences regarding one or more environmental characteristics. A learning module may use the user's past preferences as a learning set for the user or a group to which the user belongs. Preferences may include environmental preferences or preferences related to target equipment (eg, service machines and/or production machines).

In some embodiments, the control system regulates various aspects of the enclosure. For example, a control system can regulate the environment of an enclosure. The control system can anticipate the user's future environmental preferences and adjust the environment to these preferences in advance (eg, at a future time). Preference environment characteristics may be assigned based on (i) user or group of users, (ii) time, (iii) date, and/or (iv) space. Profile preferences may include seasonality preferences. Environmental characteristics can include lighting, ventilation velocity, barometric pressure, odor, temperature, humidity, carbon dioxide, oxygen, VOC, particulate matter (such as dust), or color. The environmental characteristic may be a preferred color scheme or theme for the enclosure. For example, at least a portion of the enclosure can be projected (eg projected colour, image or video) by a preferred theme. For example, the user is a heart patient and prefers (eg needs) an oxygen content higher than the ambient oxygen content (eg 20% oxygen) and/or a certain humidity level (eg 70%). When a cardiac patient occupant is in an enclosure, the control system can adjust the atmosphere of the environment (eg by controlling the BMS) for that oxygen and humidity level.

In some embodiments, the control system can operate the target device according to the preferences of a user or group of users. Preferences may be based on the user's past behavior (eg, settings, service selections, timing-related selections, and/or location-related selections) with respect to the target device. For example, a user might grab a latte with 1 teaspoon of sugar from a coffee machine near his desk at a first location at 9:00 AM. The coffee machine at the first location may automatically produce the cup of coffee at 9:00 am in the first location. For example, a user group such as a work team prefers to enter a meeting room with a forest background, a little breeze, and at 22°C. The control system can control projected forest backgrounds (eg, on walls and/or media screens) in each meeting room while the group is meeting, adjust the ventilation system to have a breeze, and adjust the HVAC system to 22°C. A control system can facilitate this control by controlling the HVAC system, projectors, and/or media displays.

In some embodiments, the control system can adjust the environment and/or the target device according to hierarchical preferences. When several different users with conflicting preferences (eg, different groups of users) gather in an enclosure, the control system can adjust the environment and/or target devices according to the pre-established hierarchy. Hierarchies can include jurisdictional (e.g., health and/or safety) standards, health, safety, employee levels, activities occurring in enclosures, number of occupants in enclosures, enclosure types, time of day, dates, seasons and/or events at the facility.

In some embodiments, the control system considers results (eg, results based on science and/or research) regarding environmental conditions that affect the health, safety, and/or performance of enclosure occupants. The control system may establish thresholds and/or preferred window ranges for one or more environmental characteristics of the enclosure (eg, of the enclosure's atmosphere). Thresholds may include levels of atmospheric components (eg, VOCs and/or gases), temperature, and a certain time level. A certain level can be abnormally high, abnormally low, or average. For example, the controller may allow brief periods of abnormally high VOC levels, but not allow those VOC levels to persist for long periods of time. If the user's preference conflicts with health and/or safety thresholds, the control system can automatically modify the user's preference. Health and/or safety thresholds may be at a higher hierarchical level relative to user preferences. Classes can take advantage of most preferences. For example, if two occupants of a conference room have a preference and a third occupant has a conflicting preference, the preferences of the two occupants will prevail (e.g. unless such preferences are related to health and/or safety considerations conflict).

29 shows an example of a flowchart depicting the operation of a control system operatively coupled to one or more devices in an enclosure (eg, a facility). At block 2900, the identity of the user is identified by the control system. Identity can be identified by one or more sensors (eg, a camera) and/or by an identification tag (eg, by scanning or otherwise sensing by one or more sensors). In optional block 2901, the location of the user may optionally be tracked as the user spends time in the enclosure. The user may provide input regarding any preferences. Preferences may relate to target device and/or environmental characteristics. In optional block 2903, the learning module may optionally track such preferences and provide predictions about any future preferences of the user. The user's past selection preferences can be recorded (for example in a database) and can be used as a learning set for a learning module. As the learning process progresses over time and the user provides more and more input, the accuracy of the learning module's predictions can increase. A learning module may include any of the learning solutions disclosed herein (including, for example, artificial intelligence and/or machine learning). Users can modify the recommendations and/or predictions made by the learning module. A user may provide manual input into the control system. In block 2902, user input is provided (either directly by the user or through predictions from a learning module) to the control system. In block 2904, the control system may change (or direct to change) one or more devices in the facility by using the input to implement the user preference (eg, input). The control system may or may not use the user's location. The location can be a past location or a current location. For example, a user can enter a workplace by scanning a tag. Scanning of an identification tag (ID tag) informs the control system of the identity of the user and the location of the user at the time of the scan. The user can express a preference for a certain level of sound that constitutes the input. Expression of preferences may be through manual input including tactile, voice and/or gesture commands. Past statements of preference can be registered in a database and linked to the user. Users can enter the conference room at a pre-scheduled time. (i) when a pre-scheduled conference is scheduled to initiate and/or (ii) when one or more sensors sense the presence of a user in the conference room, the sound level in the conference room can be adjusted to user preferences. (i) when a pre-scheduled meeting is scheduled to end and/or (ii) when one or more sensors sense that there are no users in the meeting room, the sound level in the meeting room can be adjusted Return to default level and/or adjust to another preference.

In some embodiments, a user indicates at least one preference for an environmental characteristic and/or a target device, the preference constituting an input. Input may be by manual input including tactile, voice and/or gesture commands. Past representations of preferences (eg, inputs) can be registered in a database and linked to the user. A user may be part of a user group. A user group can be any grouping disclosed herein. A user's preferences can be linked to the groups to which the user belongs. A user may enter the enclosure at a pre-scheduled time. The environmental characteristics of the enclosure can be adjusted to the user (i) when the user is scheduled to enter the enclosure and/or (ii) when one or more sensors sense the presence of the user in the enclosure preference. The environmental characteristics of the enclosure may be returned to the intended state (i) when the presence of a scheduled user in the enclosure terminates and/or (ii) when one or more sensors sense the absence of a user in the enclosure. Set the level and/or adjust to another preference. (i) when the user is scheduled to use the target device and/or (ii) when one or more sensors sense the presence of the user in the vicinity (e.g., within a predetermined distance threshold) of the target device to adjust the target device to user preference. (i) at the end of the user's scheduled use of the target device and/or (ii) when one or more sensors sense the absence of the user in the vicinity (e.g., within a predetermined distance threshold) of the target device , the target device can return to the default setting or adjust to another preference.

In some embodiments, the data is analyzed by a learning module. The data can be sensor data and/or user input. User input may relate to one or more preferred environmental characteristics and/or target devices. A learning module may include at least one rational decision-making process, and/or learning using data (eg, as a study set). Data analysis can be used to adjust the environment, for example, by adjusting one or more components that affect the environment of the enclosure. Data analysis can be used to control a target device based on user preferences, eg, to produce a product, and/or select a target device (eg, based on user preferences and/or user location). Data analysis can be performed by machine-based systems (eg, including circuits). A circuit may have a processor. Sensor data analysis can leverage artificial intelligence. Data analysis may rely on one or more models (eg, mathematical models). In some embodiments, data analysis comprises linear regression, least squares fitting, Gaussian procedure regression, kernel regression, nonparametric multiplicative regression (NPMR), regression trees, local regression, semiparametric regression, isotonic regression, multivariate adaptive Regression splines (MARS), logistic regression, robust regression, polynomial regression, stepwise regression, ridge regression, lasso regression, elastic net regression, principal component analysis (PCA), singular value decomposition, fuzzy measure theory, Borel ) measure, Han (Han) measure, risk-neutral measure, Lebesgue (Lebesgue) measure, grouped data processing method (GMDH), naive Bayesian classifier, k-nearest neighbor algorithm (k-NN), support Vector Machines (SVM), Neural Networks, Support Vector Machines, Classification and Regression Trees (CART), Random Forests, Gradient Boosting or Generalized Linear Modeling (GLM) techniques. Data analysis may include deep learning algorithms and/or artificial neural networks (ANN). Data analysis can include a learning scheme with multiple layers in a network (eg, ANN). The learning of the learning modules can be supervised, semi-supervised or unsupervised. Learning modules can include statistical methods. Deep learning architectures can include deep neural networks, deep belief networks, recurrent neural networks, or convolutional neural networks. The learning solutions may be for computer vision, machine vision, speech recognition, natural language processing, audio recognition, social network filtering, machine translation, bioinformatics, drug design, medical image analysis, materials inspection programs, and/or board game programs learning plan.

In some examples, the target device is a tintable window (eg, an electrochromic window). In some embodiments, the dynamic state of the electrochromic window is controlled by changing a voltage signal to an electrochromic device (ECD) used to provide tinting or dyeing. Electrochromic windows may be manufactured, configured, or otherwise provided as insulating glass units (IGUs). An IGU may serve as the basic structure for holding an electrochromic pane (also known as a "window") when provided for installation in a building. IGU windows or panes can be a single substrate or a multi-substrate construction, such as a laminate of two substrates. IGUs, especially those with dual-pane or triple-pane configurations, can offer several advantages over single-pane configurations; for example, multi-pane configurations can provide Enhanced thermal insulation, noise immunity, environmental protection, and/or durability. For example, multi-pane configurations can also provide increased protection against ECDs because electrochromic films and associated layers and conductive interconnects can be formed on the interior surfaces of multi-pane IGUs and protected by the interior of the IGUs. Inert gas filling protection in the volume.

In some embodiments, a tintable window exhibits a (eg, controllable and/or reversible) change in at least one optical property of the window, eg, upon application of a stimulus. Stimulation may include optical, electrical and/or magnetic stimulation. Stimulation may include, for example, applying a voltage. One or more tintable windows may be used to control lighting and/or glare conditions, for example, by regulating the transmission of solar energy propagating therethrough. One or more tintable windows can be used to control the temperature within a building, for example, by regulating the transmission of solar energy propagating therethrough. Control of solar energy can control the heat load imposed on the interior of a facility (eg, a building). Control can be manual and/or automatic. Controls may be used to maintain one or more requested (eg, environmental) conditions, such as occupant comfort. Control may include reducing energy consumption of heating, ventilation, air conditioning and/or lighting systems. At least two of heating, ventilation and air conditioning may be induced by separate systems. At least two of heating, ventilation and air conditioning can be induced by one system. Heating, ventilation, and air conditioning can be induced by a single system (abbreviated herein as "HVAC"). In some cases, a tintable window may be responsive to (eg, and communicatively coupled to) one or more environmental sensors and/or user controls. A tintable window may include, and for example may be, an electrochromic window. A window may be located in a range from the interior to the exterior of a structure (eg, a facility, such as a building). However, it doesn't have to be. Tintable windows can be operated using liquid crystal devices, suspended particle devices, microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) devices such as microshutters, or any technology now known or later developed configured to control the transmission of light through the window. Examples of windows (e.g., with MEMS devices for tinting) are described in U.S. Patent Application No. 14/443,353, filed May 15, 2015, entitled "MULTI-PANE WINDOWS INCLUDING ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES AND ELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEVICES" , which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In some cases, one or more tintable windows may be located inside a building, such as between a conference room and a hallway. In some cases, one or more tintable windows may be used in automobiles, trains, airplanes, and other vehicles, eg, in place of passive and/or non-tinting windows.

In some embodiments, the tintable window comprises an electrochromic device (referred to herein as an "EC device" (abbreviated herein as ECD, or "EC")). The EC device may comprise at least one coating comprising at least one layer. At least one layer may comprise an electrochromic material. In some embodiments, the electrochromic material exhibits a change from one optical state to another, such as when an electrical potential is applied across the EC device. The transition of the electrochromic layer from one optical state to another may eg be caused by reversible, semi-reversible or irreversible ion insertion (eg by means of intercalation) into the electrochromic material and corresponding injection of charge-balancing electrons. For example, the transition of an electrochromic layer from one optical state to another may eg be caused by reversible ion insertion (eg by means of intercalation) into the electrochromic material and corresponding injection of charge balancing electrons. Reversibility can be directed against the life expectancy of the ECD. Semi-reversible refers to a measurable (eg, noticeable) deterioration of the reversibility of the tint of a window over one or more tinting cycles. In some cases, a portion of the ions responsible for the optical transition is irreversibly incorporated in the electrochromic material (eg, and thus, the induced (altered) tint state of the window is not reversible to its original colored state). In various EC devices, at least some (eg, all) of the irreversibly bound ions can be used to compensate for "blind charges" in the material (eg, ECD).

In some implementations, suitable ions include cations. The cations may include lithium ions (Li+) and/or hydrogen ions (H+) (ie, protons). In some implementations, other ions may be suitable. Cations can be intercalated into (eg metal) oxides. A change in the intercalation state of ions (eg, cations) into the oxide can induce a visible change in the hue (eg, color) of the oxide. For example, oxides can transition from a colorless state to a colored state. For example, intercalation of lithium ions into tungsten oxide (WO3-y (0 < y ≤ about 0.3)) can cause tungsten oxide to change from a transparent state to a colored (eg, blue) state. EC device coatings as described herein are located within the viewable portion of the tintable window such that tinting of the EC device coating can be used to control the optical state of the tintable window.

Figure 23 shows an example of a schematic cross-section of an electrochromic device 2300 according to some embodiments. The EC device coating is attached to a substrate 2302, a transparent conductive layer (TCL) 2304, an electrochromic layer (EC) 2306 (also sometimes referred to as a cathodically colored layer or cathodically colored layer), an ionically conductive layer, or An area (ion conducting, IC) 2308 , a counter electrode layer (counter electrode, CE) 2310 (sometimes also referred to as an anode coloring layer or anodic coloring layer), and a second TCL 2314 . Components 2304 , 2306 , 2308 , 2310 , and 2314 are collectively referred to as electrochromic stack 2320 . A voltage source 2316 operable to apply a potential across the electrochromic stack 2320 effectuates the transition of the electrochromic coating from, for example, a clear state to a colored state. In other embodiments, the order of the layers is reversed with respect to the substrate. That is, the layers are in the following order: substrate, TCL, counter electrode layer, ionically conductive layer, electrochromic material layer, TCL. In various embodiments, an ion conductor region (eg, 2308 ) can be formed from a portion of the EC layer (eg, 2306 ) and/or from a portion of the CE layer (eg, 2310 ). In such embodiments, an electrochromic stack (eg, 2320 ) can be deposited to include a cathodically dyed electrochromic material (EC layer) in direct physical contact with an anodically dyed counter electrode material (CE layer). Ionically conductive regions (sometimes referred to as interfacial regions or ionically conductive substantially electronically insulating layers or regions) can be formed where the EC and CE layers meet, for example, via heating and/or other processing steps. Examples of electrochromic devices (including, for example, those fabricated without depositing dissimilar ion conductor materials) can be found in U.S. Patent Application titled "ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES," filed May 2, 2012 Ser. No. 13/462,725, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In some embodiments, the EC device coating may include one or more additional layers, such as one or more passive layers. Passive layers can be used to improve certain optical properties, to provide moisture and/or to provide scratch resistance. These and/or other passive layers may be used to hermetically seal EC stack 2320 . Various layers including transparent conductive layers such as 2304 and 2314 can be treated with antireflective and/or protective layers (eg, oxide and/or nitride layers).

In some embodiments, an IGU includes two (or more) substantially transparent substrates. For example, an IGU may include two panes of glass. At least one substrate of the IGU may include an electrochromic device disposed thereon. One or more panes of the IGU may have separators disposed therebetween. The IGU can be of hermetically sealed construction, eg, with an interior area isolated from the surrounding environment. A "window assembly" may include an IGU. A "window assembly" may include (eg, stand-alone) laminates. A "window assembly" may include, for example, one or more electrical leads for connecting the IGU and/or laminate. Electrical leads may operatively couple (eg, connect) one or more electrochromic devices to voltage sources, switches, and the like, and may include a frame supporting the IGU or laminate. A window assembly may include a window operator, and/or components of a window operator (eg, a docking piece).

FIG. 24 shows an example implementation of an IGU 2400 that includes a first pane 2404 having a first surface S1 and a second surface S2. In some embodiments, the first surface S1 of the first pane 2404 faces the external environment, such as the outdoors or outside environment. The IGU 2400 also includes a second pane 2406 having a first surface S3 and a second surface S4. In some implementations, the second surface S4 of the second pane 2406 faces the interior environment, such as the interior environment of a home, building, or vehicle or a room or compartment within the home, building, or vehicle.

In some embodiments, first pane 2404 and/or second pane 2406 (eg, each) are transparent and/or translucent to, eg, light in the visible spectrum. For example, first pane 2404 and/or second pane 2406 (e.g., each) may be made of a glass material (e.g., architectural glass or other shatter-resistant glass such as, for example, a silicon oxide (SO _x )-based glass material material) is formed. The first pane 2404 and/or the second pane 2406 (eg, each) can be a soda lime glass substrate or a float glass substrate. Such glass substrates may consist of, for example, approximately 75% silicon dioxide (SiO ₂ ) with Na ₂ O, CaO, and several minor amounts of additives. However, first pane 2404 and/or second pane 2406 (eg, each) may be formed from any material having suitable optical, electrical, thermal, and mechanical properties. For example, other suitable substrates that may be used for one or both of the first pane 2404 and the second pane 2406 may include other glass materials as well as plastics, semi-plastics, and thermoplastic materials such as poly(methyl methacrylate ), polystyrene, polycarbonate, allyl diglycol carbonate, SAN (styrene acrylonitrile copolymer), poly(4-methyl-1-pentene), polyester, polyamide), and/or mirror material. In some embodiments, first pane 2404 and/or second pane 2406 (eg, each) can be strengthened, eg, by tempering, heating, or chemical strengthening.

In FIG. 24 , first pane 2404 and second pane 2406 are spaced apart from each other by spacer 2418 , which is generally a frame structure, to form interior volume 2408 . In some embodiments, the interior volume is filled with argon (Ar) or another gas, such as another inert gas (e.g., krypton (Kr) or xenon (Xn)), another (non-inert) gas, or a combination of gases. mixture (for example, air). Filling the interior volume 2408 with a gas such as Ar, Kr, or Xn can reduce conductive heat transfer through the IGU 2400 . Without wishing to be bound by theory, this may be due to the low thermal conductivity of these gases and improved sound insulation, eg due to their increased atomic weight. In some embodiments, interior volume 2408 may be evacuated of air or other gas. The spacer 2418 generally determines the height "C" of the interior volume 2408 (eg, the spacing between the first pane 2404 and the second pane 2406). In FIG. 24, the thicknesses (and/or relative thicknesses) of the ECD, encapsulant 2420/2422, and bus bars 2426/2428 may not be to scale. These components are generally thin and are exaggerated here, eg, for ease of illustration only. In some embodiments, the spacing "C" between the first pane 2404 and the second pane 2406 is in the range of about 6 mm to about 30 mm. The width "D" of the spacers 2418 may be in the range of about 5 mm to about 15 mm (although other widths are possible and may be desired). Spacers 2418 may be frame structures formed around all sides of IGU 2400 (eg, the top side, bottom side, left side, and right side of IGU 2400 ). For example, the spacer 2418 may be formed of foam or plastic material. In some embodiments, the spacer 2418 may be formed from metal or other conductive material, for example, from a metal tube or channel structure having at least 3 sides, for sealing to both sides of each of the substrates, and the support and One side of the window is separated and serves as the surface on which the sealant 2424 is applied. The first primary seal 2420 adheres and hermetically seals the spacer 2418 and the second surface S2 of the first pane 2404 . The second primary seal 2422 adheres and hermetically seals the spacer 2418 and the first surface S3 of the second pane 2406 . In some implementations, each of the primary seals 2420 and 2422 may be formed from an adhesive sealant such as, for example, polyisobutylene (PIB). In some implementations, the IGU 2400 further includes a secondary seal 2424 that hermetically seals the perimeter around the entire IGU 2400 outside the divider 2418 . To this end, the spacer 2418 may be inserted a distance “E” from the edges of the first pane 2404 and the second pane 2406 . Distance "E" may be in the range of about four (4) millimeters (mm) to about eight (8) mm (although other distances are possible and desired). In some implementations, the secondary seal 2424 can be formed from an adhesive sealant, such as, for example, a polymeric material that is waterproof and adds structural support to the assembly, such as silicone, polyurethane, and other materials that form a watertight seal. Similar to structural sealers.

In the example of FIG. 24, the ECD coating on surface S2 of substrate 2404 extends around its entire perimeter to spacer 2418 and under the spacer. This configuration is functionally desirable because it protects the edges of the ECD within the primary encapsulant 2420, and aesthetically desirable since there is a monolithic ECD within the inner perimeter of the spacer 2418 without Any bus bars or dashes.

The configuration example of IGU is described in the invention titled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOW FABRICATION METHODS" announced on April 24, 2012 in US Patent No. 8,164,818 (Attorney Case No. VIEWP006), and the invention filed on April 25, 2012 U.S. Patent Application No. 13/456,056 (Attorney Docket No. VIEWP006X1) entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOW FABRICATION METHODS" and an international patent application titled "THIN-FILM DEVICES AND FABRICATION" filed on December 10, 2012 Patent Application No. PCT/US12/68817 (Attorney's Case No. VIEWP036WO), U.S. Patent No. 9,454,053 (Attorney's Case No. VIEWP036US), and the international patent application No. PCT/US14/73081 (attorney case No. VIEWP036X1WO) filed on December 13, 2014 with the title of "THIN-FILM DEVICES AND FABRICATION", The entire contents of each of these patents are hereby incorporated by reference.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 , ECD 2410 is formed on second surface S2 of first pane 2404 . ECD 2410 includes an electrochromic ("EC") stack 2412, which itself may include one or more layers. For example, EC stack 2412 may include an electrochromic layer, an ion-conducting layer, and an opposing electrode layer. The electrochromic layer can be formed from one or more inorganic solid materials. An electrochromic layer may include or be formed from one or more of several electrochromic materials, including electrochemical cathode or electrochemical anode materials. EC stack 2412 may be between first and second conductive (or "conductive") layers. For example, ECD 2410 may include a first transparent conductive oxide (TCO) layer 2414 adjacent to a first surface of EC stack 2412 and a second TCO layer 2416 adjacent to a second surface of EC stack 2412 . Examples of similar EC devices and smart windows can be found in U.S. Patent No. 8,764,950, entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES," issued Jul. 1, 2014, to Wang et al., and Pradhan et al., Feb. 16, 2016. US Patent No. 9,261,751 issued entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES," the entire contents of which applications are incorporated herein by reference. In some implementations, EC stack 2412 may also include one or more additional layers, such as one or more passive layers. For example, passive layers can be used to improve certain optical properties to provide moisture resistance or to provide scratch resistance. These or other passive layers may also be used to hermetically seal the EC stack 2412 .

In some embodiments, the choice or design of the electrochromic and opposing electrode materials substantially controls the possible optical transitions. During operation, the electrochromic layer transfers or exchanges ions to or from the opposing electrode layer in response to a voltage developed across the thickness of the EC stack (e.g., between the first and second TCO layers) ions to drive the electrochromic layer to a desired optical state. To transition the EC stack to a transparent state, a positive voltage can be applied across the EC stack (eg, such that the electrochromic layer is more positive than the opposing electrode layer). In some embodiments, in response to applying a positive voltage, the available ions in the stack reside primarily in the opposing electrode layer. When the magnitude of the potential across the EC stack is reduced or when the polarity of the potential is reversed, ions can be transported across the ion-conducting layer back to the electrochromic layer, causing the electrochromic material to transition to an opaque state (or to a "compared" state). More Shaded, Darker, or Less Transparent state). Conversely, in some embodiments using an electrochromic layer with different properties, to cause the EC stack to transition to an opaque state, a negative voltage is applied to the electrochromic layer relative to the opposing electrode layer. For example, when the magnitude of the potential across the EC stack decreases or its polarity is reversed, ions can be transported across the ion-conducting layer back to the electrochromic layer, causing the electrochromic material to transition to a clear or "bleached" state (or to Less Shaded, Lighter, or More Transparent).

In some implementations, the transfer or exchange of ions to or from the opposing electrode layer also causes an optical transition in the opposing electrode layer. For example, in some implementations, the electrochromic and opposing electrode layers are complementary dyed layers. More specifically, in some such implementations, the opposing electrode layer becomes more transparent upon or after ion transfer to the opposing electrode layer, and similarly, the electrochromic layer becomes more transparent upon or after ion transfer out of the electrochromic layer. become more transparent. Conversely, when the polarity is switched, or the potential is reduced, and ions are transferred from the counter electrode layer into the electrochromic layer, both the counter electrode layer and the electrochromic layer become less transparent.

In some embodiments, the transition of the electrochromic layer from one optical state to another is caused by reversible ion insertion (eg, by intercalation) into the electrochromic material and corresponding injection of charge-balancing electrons. For example, a certain fraction of the ions responsible for the optical transition is irreversibly incorporated in the electrochromic material. In some embodiments, suitable ions include lithium ions (Li+) and hydrogen ions (H+) (ie, protons). In some other implementations, other ions may be suitable. Intercalation of lithium ions, for example, into tungsten oxide (WO _3-y (0 < y ≤ ~0.3)) changes tungsten oxide from a transparent state to a blue state.

In some embodiments, the coloration transitions from a transparent (or "translucent", "bleached", or "minimally pigmented") state to an opaque (or "fully darkened" or "fully pigmented") state. Another example of a color transition is the reverse (eg, from an opaque state to a transparent state). Other examples of color transitions include transitions to and from various midtone states, eg, from a less pigmented, lighter or more transparent state to a more pigmented, darker or less transparent state, and vice versa. Each of such hue states and the color transitions between them can be characterized or described in terms of percent transmission. For example, a tint transition can be described as going from a current percent transmission (%T) to a target %T. Conversely, in some other cases, each of the hue states and the tint transition therebetween can be characterized or described in terms of a tint percentage; for example, a transition from a current tint percentage to a target tint percentage.

In some embodiments, the voltage applied to the transparent electrode layer (eg, across the EC stack) follows a controlled profile to drive transitions in the optically switchable device. For example, a window controller can be used to generate and apply a control profile to drive the ECD from a first optical state (e.g., a transparent state or a first intermediate state) to a second optical state (e.g., a fully colored state or a more colored state). Intermediate state). To drive the ECD in the reverse direction—from a more shaded state to a less shaded state—the window controller can impose a similar but reversed distribution. In some embodiments, the distribution of controls for tinting and brightening can be asymmetric. For example, a transition from a first, more colored state to a second, less colored state may in some cases be faster than the reverse (i.e., from the second, less colored state to the first, more colored state). Transformation takes more time. In some embodiments, the opposite may be true. The transition from the second less colored state to the first more colored state may require more time. By virtue of device architecture and materials, bleaching or brightening may not necessarily (eg, simply) be the opposite of staining or tinting. In practice, the ECD often behaves differently for each transition due to differences in the driving forces for ion intercalation into and deintercalation from the electrochromic material.

FIG. 25 shows an example control profile 2500 as a voltage control profile implemented by varying the voltage supplied to the ECD. For example, the solid line in Figure 25 represents the effective voltage V _Eff applied across the ECD during the tinting transition process and the subsequent sustain period. For example, a solid line may represent the relative difference in voltages V _App1 and V _App2 applied to the two conductive layers of the ECD. The dashed line in Figure 25 represents the corresponding current ( I ) through the device. In the illustrated example, the voltage control profile 2500 includes four phases: a ramp-to-drive phase 2502 to initiate the transition, a drive phase to continue the drive transition, a ramp-to-hold phase, and a subsequent hold phase.

In FIG. 25 , the ramp-to-drive phase 2502 is characterized by the application of a voltage ramp that increases in magnitude from an initial value at time t ₀ to a maximum drive value of V _Drive at time t ₁ . For example, the ramp-to-drive phase 2502 can be defined by three drive parameters known or set by the window controller: the initial voltage at t ₀ (the current voltage across the ECD at the beginning of the transition), the magnitude of V _Drive (which governs the end optical state), and the time duration during which the ramp is applied (specifying the speed of the transition). The window controller can also set a target ramp rate, a maximum ramp rate, or a type of ramp (eg, a linear ramp, a two-degree ramp, or an n-degree ramp). In some embodiments, the ramp rate may be limited so as not to damage the ECD.

In FIG. 25 , the drive phase 2504 consists of applying a constant voltage V _Drive beginning at time t ₁ and ending at time t ₂ at which point the end optical state is reached (or nearly reached). The ramp-to-hold phase 2506 is characterized by the application of a voltage ramp that decreases in magnitude from the drive value V _Drive at time t ₂ to a minimum hold value of V _Hold at time t ₃ . In some embodiments, the ramp-to-hold phase 2506 may be defined by three drive parameters known or set by the window controller: the drive voltage V _Drive , the hold voltage V _Hold , and the time duration during which the ramp is applied. The window controller can also set the ramp rate or type of ramp (eg, linear ramp, two-degree ramp, or n-degree ramp).

In FIG. 25 , the hold phase 2508 is characterized by the application of a constant voltage V _Hold beginning at time t ₃ . A hold voltage V _Hold may be used to maintain the ECD in the final optical state. Thus, the duration of application of the hold voltage V _hold may be accompanied by the duration of time the ECD is held in the finished optical state. For example, leakage current I _Leak may cause charge to be slowly drawn from the ECD due to non-idealities associated with the ECD. This ejection of charge can cause a corresponding inversion of the ions across the ECD, and thus a slow inversion of the optical transition. The hold voltage V _Hold can be continuously applied to count or prevent leakage current. In some embodiments, the hold voltage V _Hold is applied periodically to "renew" the desired optical state, or in other words, return the ECD to the desired optical state.

The voltage control profile 2500 illustrated and described with reference to FIG. 25 is but one example of a voltage control profile suitable for some implementations. However, many other distributions may be desirable or suitable in such an implementation, or in various other implementations or applications. Such other distributions can also be readily achieved using the controllers and optically switchable devices disclosed herein. For example, a current profile may be applied instead of a voltage profile. In some embodiments, a current control profile similar to that of the current density shown in FIG. 25 may be applied. In some embodiments, the control profile may have more than four stages. For example, a voltage control profile may include one or more overdrive phases. For example, the voltage ramp applied during the first phase 2502 may increase in magnitude beyond the drive voltage V _Drive by an overdrive voltage V _OD . The first phase 2502 may be followed by a ramp phase 2503 during which the applied voltage is reduced from the overdrive voltage V _OD to the drive voltage V _Drive . In some embodiments, the overdrive voltage V _OD may be applied for a relatively short time duration before ramping down back to the drive voltage V _Drive .

In some embodiments, the applied voltage or current profile is interrupted for a relatively short duration to provide an open circuit condition across the device. While such open circuit conditions are valid, the actual voltage or other electrical characteristic can be measured, detected or otherwise determined to monitor the progress of the optical transition and, in some cases, determine whether a change in profile is desired. Such an open circuit condition may also be provided during the hold phase to determine whether the hold voltage V _Hold should be applied or the magnitude of the hold voltage V _Hold should be changed. Examples related to controlling optical transitions are provided in International Patent Application No. PCT/US14/43514, filed June 20, 2014, entitled "CONTROLLING TRANSITIONS IN OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES," which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety middle.

In some embodiments, the control system includes logic. Logic may include one or more logic components (eg, logic modules). For example, logic may comprise at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 8 individual logic components. At least two of the separate logic components may interact (eg, complement, co-exist, and/or cooperate) with each other. At least two of the logic components can operate in parallel with each other. At least two of the individual logic components may be combined into a combined logic component. Figure 30 shows an example of a control system 3000 comprising six separate logical components: (1) intelligent control, (2) script control, (3) solar computing, (4) database communication period, (5) network controller, and (6) thread control. Each of the individual logic components has a different role as depicted in Table 3001: Smart Control Module maintains an inventory of areas and sensors, sleepers Timer for script control to run every time frame (e.g., 5 minutes) , and get the sensor value. The script controls the use of various submodules (eg, A to E) to determine the optimal tint value for each tintable window. The database communication module uses intelligent control modules, sensors, and weather data to handle database operations. The solar calculation module calculates the sun position, sunrise time, sunset time, and daylight saving time offset. The network controller module sends the computed tine command decision to the tintable window. The thread control module generates and maintains threads in the smart control module. Examples of tintable windows, control systems, sensors, artificial intelligence, and modules A, B, C, D, and E may be found in an invention filed on February 11, 2021 entitled "PREDICTIVE MODELING FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS" Found in International Patent Application No. PCT/US21/17603, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

In some embodiments, the control system includes or is operatively coupled to the simulator. A simulator may include one or more operations. Figure 31 shows an example of the operation of the simulator including (1) input data collection and formatting, (2) data input and running the simulation, and (3) simulation output processing and analysis. Input data may include a three-dimensional (eg, architectural) model of the facility, raw sensor data, and scripts that process the (eg, raw) sensor data to assist in the simulation. The simulation utilizes the input and is executed on one or more processors. Simulation output contains simulation results. Simulation results can be imported into a database. Analog outputs include hue determinations, calculated sensor values, time stamps, and/or the like. In the example of FIG. 31 , all regions are simulated for analysis purposes. The results can be further analyzed offline, such as performing evaluations, and optimizations (eg, for use in intelligent control modules).

In some embodiments, the behavior of one or more devices of a facility may be simulated. Devices may include any controllable device in a facility, eg, a sensor (eg, sensor reading), tintable window, HVAC system, or any other device (eg, such as any device disclosed herein). Figure 32 shows an example of a graph depicting physical sensor readings and simulated data over time. Graph 3200 shows a simulation of infrared temperature sensor (eg, RS sensor) measurements over the time span of July 31, 2021 before those measurements are actually taken. Graph 3250 shows measurements of a physical infrared temperature sensor (eg, RS sensor) taken over the time span of July 31, 2021 for comparison.

In some embodiments, the control system includes intelligent control logic component modules (eg, software modules). In some embodiments, an intelligent control module is responsible for calculating and/or forwarding tint determinations to one or more tintable windows. The intelligent control module may utilize data from 2D and/or 3D models of facilities (e.g., architectural models of facilities), facility area data, sun data, sensor data (e.g., thermal data, sky sensor data), and weather information. In some embodiments, the intelligent control module calculates the optimal tint state and transfers the information to the network controller(s). The smart control module can maintain a configuration, inventory, and/or database of (1) building area(s) and/or (2) sensor(s). For example, the smart control module can maintain an inventory of all zones and sensors in the facility (eg, their corresponding attributes, etc.). In some embodiments, the intelligent control module stores sun position and/or historical thermal data to calculate optimal tint conditions (eg, used with or inherited from real-time sensor data). Sensor data can be queried per time frame. The time frame can be up to about every 0.5 minutes (min.), min., 2.5 min., 5 min., or 10 min. The time frame may be at least about every 2.5 min., 5 min., or 10 min., 20 min., 30 min., 45 min., 60 min., or 120 min. Obtained sensor measurements (eg, IR and RS measurements) may be adjusted by filtering and/or calibration. Filtering may include boxcar calibration. Filtering can include high-pass or low-pass filters. The intelligent control module can calculate the planned (eg, recommended) hue state for the scheduled time. The final tint determination can be forwarded (e.g., via an intelligent control module) to other component(s) of the control system, such as to the network controller(s), to effectuate changes in state of the controllable device(s) For example, changing the tint of a tintable window).

In some embodiments, an intelligent control module may receive an input. The input can include precomputed fields from the model of the facility structure. The model of the facility may include an architectural model of the facility. A model of a facility may include a two-dimensional (2D) or three-dimensional (3D) model. A model of a facility may include window mapping in the facility, tone mapping of windows in the facility, sensor mapping in the facility, sensor orientation relative to the facility and/or geographic location, sensor orientation relative to the facility and/or geographic location Window orientation, depth of radiant penetration into the facility through the window, geographic configuration of the facility, or hue zone preference. Inputs may include dynamic fields, such as sensor data and/or weather data. Data may include sensor readings (eg, of any of the sensors disclosed herein). The data may include weather data. The data may include infrared sensor readings, directional light sensor readings, ambient temperature readings, sun elevation and azimuth, humidity readings, pressure readings, cloud cover, wind speed, or wind direction.

In some embodiments, the smart control module has several configurable parameters. Configurable parameters may include thresholds for sun position, thresholds for sunlight penetration depth into the facility, thresholds for sensor readings (e.g., sky), weather condition settings, or facility configuration (e.g., to account for facility external environment). Facility configuration(s) can contain pre-color parameters or tint delay time boxes. The sun position configuration may include elevation values, azimuth values, penetration depth thresholds for light entering the facility, illumination thresholds, time-based thresholds (e.g., based at least in part on morning, noon, or evening) . Thermal and/or light sensor thresholds may include thermal radiation thresholds, sensor level thresholds, sensor to tone level mapping, or sensor data smoothing parameters. Dynamic weather conditions may include hue state hold times, cloudiness thresholds and shifts, light to dark delta values, dark to light delta values, or ambient temperature thresholds. Ambient temperature refers to the temperature of the surrounding environment. For example, ambient room temperature refers to the average temperature in a room. For example, the ambient temperature outside the facility refers to the average temperature outside the facility.

In some embodiments, the control system is operatively coupled to or includes an analog module assembly. The simulation module component may be called "IntelliSim". Simulation modules can be used to identify parameterizations that cause certain occupant behaviors such as overriding present or future decisions of the control system. The simulation module can be used to understand and/or learn how the conditions leading to such occupant behavior can be actively compensated for with a configuration of preferences that will predict (with high accuracy) the behavior of the facility's occupants. Occupants may be identified by a simulation module (eg, automatically), or may self-identify themselves using user input (eg, through an application, such as any of the applications disclosed herein). A simulation module may be incorporated or operatively coupled to a learning module. A learning module may utilize (eg, as disclosed herein) artificial intelligence. For example, learning modules can utilize artificial intelligence to calculate solutions. A simulation module may have one or more functions including: (1) simulating decisions about the controllable state of any facility's devices based on actual (e.g., sensor and/or user input) data, (2) Incorporate realistic sensor readings and structural (e.g., 3D or 2D) models of a given facility, (3) output in a shorter period of time for intelligent control-related decisions over a longer period, or (4) test, evaluate, And/or optimize intelligent control parameterization to simplify its control logic. A longer period of time can be at least about a day, a week, a month, a season, half a year, or a year. A longer period of time can be at least about one day, five days, one week, two weeks, one month, three months, four months, six months, or one year. The longer time may be any value between and inclusive of the aforementioned longer time values. A shorter period of time can be up to about 1 hour (h), 2h, 3h, 4h, 5h, 10h, 20h, or 24h. The shorter time period may be any value between and inclusive of the foregoing shorter time values. For example, a simulation module may have features that include: (1) simulating any facility's shading decisions based on actual data, (2) incorporating actual sky sensor readings and 3D models for a given facility, (3) outputting in a short time for All smart control related decisions for a long period of time (e.g. output in about four hours for a week (all windows)), or (4) testing, evaluation, and optimization of smart control parameterization to simplify its control logic One or more functions. The simulation module improves intelligent control decisions over simulated longer time frames for fast iterations. The simulation module can (eg, automatically) identify and/or test smart control recipes for standard deployment types and verticals. Simulation modules can inform and/or assist in the development of (eg, improvements to) next-generation intelligent control logic, behavior, and/or computing solutions. The simulation module can make up smart problems on the spot using insights into the effects of reparameterization related to smart control modules.

The simulation module may utilize (1) a list of zones and/or their current states (e.g., the current state of the controllable device(s) in a zone), (2) a list of sensors and their attributes, ( 3) Mining sensors every time interval (e.g., five minutes), (3) adjusted sensor values utilized (e.g., filtered and/or calibrated values), (4) adjustments (e.g., calibrated ) sensor values in ambient conditions susceptible to influence (e.g., light and/or temperature sensors in adjustment conditions, e.g., light-to-dark and dark-to-bright), (5) operatively coupled to solar computing module to calculate the sun's position at a (e.g., scheduled) time, (6) for each zone, call a script-controlled function to calculate the ideal state of each device in the zone (e.g., the ideal state for a tintable window in the zone) coloring state), (7) using a region map to convert coloring results into user-preferred coloring, and/or (8) operatively coupled to a network controller module to set target state commands to controllable devices, To transition or maintain a target state in a controllable device (eg, set a target tinting command on a tintable window). The simulation module (IntelliSim) is operable to (a) maintain and/or use an inventory of zones, (b) maintain and/or use an inventory of devices in at least one (e.g., each) zone, (c) maintain and/or Using current state(s) of device(s) in at least one zone, (d) maintaining and/or using a list of sensors and their attributes, (e) querying sensor measurements per time frame, (f) maintaining and/or using filtered sensor values, (g) adjusting sensor values in conditions identified as requiring adjustment, (h) operatively coupling to an external module (e.g., a solar calculation module) group to calculate the sun position), (i) for at least one zone of the facility, call a script-controlled function to calculate the desired state of the controllable devices in the zone, (j) maintain and/or use zone maps (or tables) to map The controllable state (e.g., tint) results in a user-preferred state for the controllable device (e.g., preferred tint for a tintable window), (k) calling the network controller module to set the target state command for the controllable device, or (l) any combination thereof.

Example embodiment: Clause 1. A method for controlling a facility, the method comprising: receiving an input from a user indicating that a first state of a device of the facility is to change to a second state, the input being passed through a network receiving; predicting a third state of the device at a future time at least in part by using a machine learning model that considers the input from the user; and (I) proposing the third state and/or (II ) adjust the device to the third state at the future time.

Clause 2. The method of Clause 1, wherein the input is received via an application executing on a user device of the user.

Clause 3: The method of Clause 2, wherein the third state is proposed to the user via the application executing on the user device.

Clause 4: The method of any one of Clauses 1 to 3, wherein proposing the third state comprises (a) proposing to adjust the device to the third state at the future time, and/or (b) responding to A determination is made that a set of conditions has occurred under which the input is received proposing to adjust the device to the third state at a plurality of future times.

Clause 5: The method of Clause 4, further comprising providing a user response to the proposal to the machine learning model.

Clause 6: The method of any one of Clauses 1 to 5, wherein the machine learning model constructs a training sample based at least in part on the input received, and wherein the training sample can be used to learn from the machine learning model Generate future predictions.

Clause 7: The method of Clause 6, wherein the facility is a first facility, wherein the user is a first user, and wherein the future predictions (i) are related to a second facility other than the first facility facilities, and/or (ii) relate to a second user other than the first user.

Clause 8: The method of any one of Clauses 1 to 7, wherein the device is a tintable window.

Clause 9: The method of any one of Clauses 1 to 8, wherein the device is an environmental conditioning system component, a security system component, a health system component, an electrical system component, a communication system component, and/or A people conveyor system component.

Clause 10: The method of Clause 9, wherein the people conveyance system comprises an elevator.

Clause 11: The method of any of Clauses 9 or 10, wherein the environmental conditioning system comprises an HVAC component or a lighting system component.

Clause 12: The method of any one of Clauses 9 to 11, wherein the communication system comprises a transparent media display.

Clause 13: The method of any one of clauses 9 to 12, wherein the transparent media display (i) comprises a transparent organic light emitting diode array, and/or (ii) is operatively coupled to a tintable window .

Clause 14: The method of any one of clauses 1 to 13, wherein the input indicates a user request to overwrite the first state of the device with the second state of the device.

Clause 15. The method of any one of clauses 1 to 14, wherein the input is received under a set of conditions, and wherein adjusting the device to the third state at the future time is in response to detecting the The group condition occurs at that future time.

Clause 16: The method of any one of clauses 1 to 15, wherein proposing the third state comprises proposing the third state to a user other than the user from whom the input was received.

Clause 17: The method of any one of Clauses 1 to 16, wherein the third state is equal to the first state or the second state.

Clause 18: The method of any one of Clauses 1 to 17, wherein the machine learning model takes into account the input at least in part by causing the device to adjust to the third state at the future time.

Clause 19: The method of any one of clauses 1 to 18, wherein the machine learning model considers the input at least in part by determining that one or more parameters associated with the input match one or more parameters of Inputs: (i) a rule-based pattern generated by the machine learning model, and/or (ii) a heuristic used by the machine learning model.

Clause 20: The method of Clause 19, wherein the one or more parameters include timing information, user identifier information, building type information associated with the facility, and/or sensor information.

Clause 21: The method of Clause 20, wherein the sensor information is indicative of sunlight penetration depth, vertical and/or horizontal shading, and/or light level.

Clause 22: The method of any of clauses 20 or 21, wherein the sensor information is indicative of a level of activity and/or a level of occupancy in an enclosure of the facility.

Clause 23: The method of any one of claims 1 to 22, wherein the machine learning model further considers a location of the user within and/or relative to the facility.

Clause 24: The method of Clause 23, wherein the location of the user within the facility is determined based at least in part on geolocation techniques, wherein the geolocation techniques optionally include radio frequency (RF) transmissions and/or sensory and wherein the radio frequency optically comprises ultra-wideband (UWB) frequencies.

Clause 25: The method of any of Clauses 23 or 24, wherein the device is identified based at least in part on the location of the user within the facility.

Clause 26: An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one processor configured to (I) be operatively coupled to a network and ((II) execute the Any one of the methods 1 to 25 or directs the execution of any one of these methods.

Clause 27: An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one processor configured to: operatively couple to a network; receive instructions from a user indicating the facility's Receipt of an input that a first state of a device will change to a second state or that directs the input, the input being received over the network; receiving information indicative of a predicted third state for the device at a future time or directing the receipt of the information, wherein the predicted third state is determined by a machine learning model that considers the input from the user; and (1) suggesting or guiding proposing to transform the device into the one presented to the user The third state, and/or (II) receiving or directing receipt of an indication that the device has adjusted to the third state.

Clause 28: Non-transitory computer-readable program instructions for controlling a facility, the non-transitory computer-readable program instructions when read by one or more processors operatively coupled to a network Cause the one or more processors to perform operations comprising performing or directing the performance of any of the methods of clauses 1-25.

Clause 29. A system for controlling a facility, the system comprising: a network configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility; transmit instructions from a user to the device of the facility an input that a first state of the device will change to a second state is received via the network; and a prediction for a third state of the device at a future time is transmitted, wherein the prediction is at least partially obtained by determining using a machine learning model that considers the input from the user; and transmitting (I) a proposal for the third state and/or (II) an instruction to adjust the device to the third state at the future time.

Clause 30: An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one controller configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility; regulate the device of the facility to adjustment of the first state or directing the device to the first state comprising a plurality of states of a first state, a second state, and a third state; and adjusting the device to the third state at a future time state or adjustment to direct the device to the third state, wherein at the future time the third state is by considering an input from a user indicating that the first state of the device of the facility will change to a second state A machine learning model predicts that the input is received over a network.

Clause 31: Non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility when read by one or more processors of the device operatively coupled to the facility Fetching causes the one or more processors to perform operations comprising: a device operatively coupled to the facility; adjusting a device of the facility to include a first state, a second state, and a first state The first state of a plurality of states of three states may cause adjustment of the device to the first state; and at a future time adjust the device to the third state or cause adjustment of the device to the third state, wherein The third state at the future time is predicted by a machine learning model that considers input from a user indicating that the first state of the device of the facility will change to a second state, the input being passed through a network road reception.

Clause 32. A method for controlling a facility, the method comprising: obtaining an input from a user indicating a preference associated with a present state of a device of the facility under a set of conditions, the input being via obtaining from a network; updating a database to include the input by the user; identifying an action to be associated with the set of conditions based at least in part on the database; and transmitting over the network one or more actions associated with the action signal.

Clause 33: The method of Clause 32, wherein the input includes feedback from the user regarding the current state of the device.

Clause 34: The method of any one of clauses 32 to 33, wherein the action comprises adjusting the device to a different state than the present state at a future time.

Clause 35: The method of any one of Clauses 32 to 34, wherein the action comprises proposing to adjust the device to a different state than the present state at a future time.

Clause 36. The method of Clause 35, wherein the proposal for adjustment is provided to a user other than the user from which the input was obtained.

Clause 37: The method of any one of clauses 32 to 36, wherein the action to be associated with the set of conditions is performed at least in part by identifying (i) a rule-based pattern and/or or (ii) heuristically identified.

Clause 38: The method of Clause 37, wherein the set of conditions includes timing information, user identifier information, building type information associated with the facility, and/or sensor information.

Clause 39: The method of Clause 38, wherein the sensor information is indicative of sunlight penetration depth, vertical and/or horizontal shading, and/or light level.

Clause 40: The method of any one of Clauses 32 to 39, wherein the action is identified based at least in part on input obtained from a plurality of users other than the user.

Clause 41: The method of any one of Clauses 32 to 40, wherein the action is based at least in part on input obtained in relation to enclosures of the facility, facilities other than the facility, or any combination thereof And identify.

Clause 42: The method of any of Clauses 32 to 41, wherein the device is a tintable window, and wherein the current state includes a current tint level of the tintable window.

Clause 43: The method of Clause 42, wherein the one or more signals transmitted over the network cause the tintable window to transition to a different hue level associated with the identified action.

Clause 44: The method of any one of Clauses 32 to 43, wherein the device is: (i) an environmental conditioning system component, (ii) a security system component, (iii) a health system component, (iv) An electrical system component, (v) a communication system component, and/or (vi) a people conveyor system component.

Clause 45: The method of any one of Clauses 32 to 44, further comprising: (I) obtaining a user response to the identified action; and (II) updating the database to include the identified action The user response for the action.

Clause 46: An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one processor configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility; obtain instructions from a user at a an input of a preference associated with a present state of the device of the facility under set conditions or leads to obtaining of the input, the input is obtained via a network; transmitting an indication of the input by the user, the transmission resulting in A database is updated to include the input by the user; and receiving one or more signals associated with an action, wherein the action is associated with the set of conditions, and wherein the action has been identified based at least in part on the database.

Clause 47: Non-transitory computer-readable program instructions for controlling a facility when read by one or more processors operatively coupled to a network Cause the one or more processors to perform operations comprising performing or directing the performance of any of the methods of clauses 32-45.

Clause 48. A system for controlling a facility, the system comprising: a network configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility; transmit an input obtained from a user, the input indicating a preference associated with a present state of a device of the facility under a set of conditions, the input obtained over the network; transmitting an indication of the input to a database, the transmission causing the database to be updated to include The input by the user; transmitting an identification of an action, wherein the action is associated with the set of conditions, and wherein the action is based at least in part on the database identification; and transmitting one or more signals associated with the action.

Clause 49: An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one controller configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility; regulate the device of the facility to a A current state or an adjustment directing the device to the present state; and receiving or directing the receipt of one or more signals associated with an action, wherein the action is associated with a set of conditions and based at least in part on a database, and wherein the action is identified in response to a user input indicating a preference associated with the present state of the device of the facility under the set of conditions, the input being obtained via a network.

Clause 50: Non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility that when read by one or more processors cause the one or more processors to execute Operations that include: being operatively coupled to a device of the facility; causing adjustment of the device of the facility to a present state; and receiving or directing one or more signals associated with an action receiving, wherein the action is associated with a set of conditions and identified based at least in part on a database, and wherein the action is responsive to a use indicating a preference associated with the present state of the device of the facility under the set of conditions is identified by an operator input obtained over a network.

Clause 51. A method for controlling a facility, the method comprising: receiving an input from a user indicating a preference associated with a state of a device of the facility, the input being via a network receiving; determining whether to change the state of the device based at least in part on (i) the input and (ii) a user rights scheme, whether changing the state of the device results in a positive determination or results in a negative determination; and The positive decision is used to change the state of the device.

Clause 52: The method of Clause 51, wherein the input is a feedback of a suggested state of the device.

Clause 53. The method of any one of clauses 51 to 52, wherein the positive determination is in response to determining that the input indicates a change in the state of the device of the facility and the user has authority to change the state of the device And happened.

Clause 54: The method of any one of Clauses 51 to 53, wherein the negative determination is in response to a determination that the input does not indicate a change in the state of the device of the facility and/or the user does not have the ability to change the device Occurs with the authority of the present state.

Clause 55: The method of any one of Clauses 51 to 54, wherein the device is a tintable window, and wherein the state of the device comprises a tint state of the tintable window.

Clause 56: The method of any one of clauses 51 to 55, wherein in response to the determination of whether to change the state of the device results in the negative determination, the state of the device is not changed.

Clause 57: The method of any one of Clauses 51 to 56, wherein the device is an environmental conditioning system component, a security system component, a health system component, an electrical system component, a communication system component, and/or A people conveyor system component.

Clause 58: The method of any one of clauses 51 to 57, wherein the user rights scheme changes over time.

Clause 59: The method of any one of clauses 51 to 58, wherein the user permissions scheme indicates permissions for the user that vary based at least in part on a geographic location of the user relative to the facility.

Clause 60: The method of any one of Clauses 51 to 59, wherein the user rights scheme is based at least in part on a role of the user within an organization.

Clause 61: The method of any one of Clauses 51 to 60, wherein the user rights scheme is based at least in part on input from a plurality of users other than the user.

Clause 62: The method of Clause 61, wherein the user rights scheme indication does not allow the user to change the state of the device in response to determining that a majority of the plurality of users disagree with the input indicating the preference.

Clause 63: An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one processor configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility and to a network; an input from an operator or leads to the receipt of the input indicating a preference associated with a state of the device of the facility, the input being received through the network; based at least in part on (i) the input and (ii) a user rights scheme determines whether to change the state of the device or directs a determination of whether to change the state of the device, the determination of whether changing the state of the device results in a positive determination or results in a negative determination; and based at least in part on The positive determination changes or induces a change in the state of the device.

Clause 64: Non-transitory computer-readable program instructions for controlling a facility when read by one or more processors operatively coupled to a network Cause the one or more processors to perform operations comprising performing or directing the performance of any of the methods of clauses 51-62.

Clause 65. A system for controlling a facility, the system comprising: a network configured to: transmit an input from a user indicating a status associated with a device of the facility a preference, the input is received over the network; transmitting a determination of whether to change the state of the device, wherein the determination is based at least in part on (i) the input and (ii) a user rights scheme, whether to change the device the determination of the state results in a positive determination or results in a negative determination; and transmitting an instruction using the positive determination to change the state of the device.

Clause 66: An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one controller configured to: operatively couple to a device of the facility and to a network; regulate the device an adjustment to a state of the device or to direct the device to the state; determining whether to change the state of the device or to direct the device based at least in part on (i) an input from a user and (ii) a user permissions scheme changing the determination of the state of the device, whether changing the determination of the state of the device results in a positive determination or results in a negative determination, the input is received over the network; and changing the device based at least in part on the positive determination the state of or guides a change in the state of the device.

Clause 67: Non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility that when read by one or more processors cause the one or more processors to execute Operations comprising: a device operatively coupled to the facility and to a network; adjusting the device to a state of the device or directing the device to the state; based at least in part on (i) from a An input by the user and (ii) a user rights scheme determines whether to change the state of the device or guides the determination of whether to change the state of the device, whether the determination to change the state of the device results in a positive determination or results in a negative determination; and changing or inducing a change in the state of the device based at least in part on the positive determination, the input being received over the network.

In one or more aspects, one or more of the functions described herein may be hardware, digital electronic circuits, analog electronic circuits, computer software, firmware (including the structures disclosed in this specification and their equivalent) or any combination thereof. Certain implementations of the subject matter described in this document can also be implemented as one or more controllers, computer programs, or physical structures, such as one or more modules of computer program instructions encoded on a computer storage medium, for Operations of the window controllers, network controllers and/or antenna controllers are performed or controlled by the window controllers, network controllers and/or antenna controllers. Any of the disclosed implementations presented as or for electrochromic windows may be implemented as or for switchable optical devices more generally, including windows, mirrors, etc.

Various modifications to the embodiments described in this disclosure may be readily apparent to those skilled in the art, and the generic principles defined herein may be applied to other implementations without departing from the spirit or scope of the disclosure. Thus, the claims are not intended to be limited to the implementations shown herein, but are to be accorded the widest scope consistent with the disclosure, principles and novel features disclosed herein. Additionally, those of ordinary skill in the art will readily appreciate that the terms "upper" and "lower" are sometimes used for ease of description of figures and to indicate the orientation corresponding to the figure on a properly oriented page. relative positions and may not reflect the true orientation of the device as implemented.

Certain features that are described in this specification in the context of separate implementations can also be implemented in combination in a single implementation. Conversely, various features that are described in the context of a single implementation can also be implemented in multiple implementations separately or in any suitable subcombination. Furthermore, although features above may be described as functioning in certain combinations and even initially claimed as such, one or more features from a claimed combination may in some cases be deleted from that combination and claimed combinations may For subgroups or changes to subgroups.

Although operations are depicted in a particular order in the drawings, this does not necessarily mean that the operations need to be performed in the particular order shown, or in sequential order, or that all depicted operations be performed to achieve desirable results. Additionally, the drawings may schematically depict one or more example procedures in flowchart form. However, other operations not depicted may be incorporated in the illustratively illustrated example procedures. For example, one or more additional operations may be performed before, after, concurrently, or between any of the illustrated operations. In certain situations, multitasking and parallel processing may be advantageous. Furthermore, the separation of various system components in the implementations described above should not be construed as requiring such separation in all implementations, and it should be understood that the described program components and systems may substantially be integrated in a single software product in a single software product. together or packaged into multiple software products. In addition, other implementations fall within the scope of the following patent applications. In some cases, the actions described in the claims can be performed in a different order and still achieve desirable results.

While preferred embodiments of the invention have been shown and described herein, it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that such embodiments are provided by way of example only. It is not intended that the invention be limited to the particular examples provided in the specification. While the invention has been described with reference to the foregoing specification, the descriptions and illustrations of the embodiments herein are not intended to be construed in a limiting sense. Numerous variations, changes, and substitutions will now occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the invention. Furthermore, it is to be understood that all aspects of the invention are not limited to the specific depictions, configurations or relative proportions set forth herein, which depend upon various conditions and variables. It should be understood that various alternatives to the embodiments of the invention described herein may be employed in practicing the invention. Accordingly, it is contemplated that the invention shall also cover any such alternatives, modifications, variations or equivalents. It is intended that the following claims define the scope of the invention and that methods and structures within the scope of these claims and their equivalents are thereby covered.

100: control system architecture 102: IGU 104: local controller; window controller 106: floor controller; network controller 108: main controller 110: external source 112: communication arrow 114: communication arrow 118: communication arrow 120: database 122: communication arrow 124: building management system (BMS) 150: enclosure 200: computer system; system 201: computer network 202: memory or memory location; memory 203: communication interface; interface 204: electronics storage unit; storage unit 205: peripheral device 206: processing unit; processor 300: network system; main controller (MC); MC 302: processor 304: main memory 306: auxiliary memory 308: facing inward Network interface 310: outward facing network interface 316: Ethernet data link 400: network controller (NC); NC 402: processor 404: main memory 406: auxiliary memory 408: downstream network Interface 410: upstream network interface 500: network controller (NC); NC 502: MC 504: database 506: WC 508: interface 510: interface 512: data recorder 514: protocol conversion module 516: analysis module 518: database manager 520: hue determination module 522: power management module 524: commissioning module 600: schema 605: sensor collective; collective; BMS 610A: sensor 610B: sensor 610C: Sensor 610D: sensor 615: processor 650: network interface 651: cloud 652: processor 654: remote processor 701: building 702: window control system; main window controller 703: main controller 705 :BMS 707a: Network Controller 707b: Network Controller 708: Terminal or Leaf Controller; Terminal Controller; Controller 710: Cloud Network 750: Gravity Vector 800: Architecture 801: Cloud Network 810: 3D Model System 820: Clear Sky Module 840: Window Control System 872: Zone 1 874: Zone n 890: Graphical User Interface (GUI) 892: Site Operations 894: Customer Success Manager (CSM) 898: Customer Configuration Portal 901: cloud network 910: cloud network 920: cloud network 940: window control system 972: area 974: area 990: GUI 999: user 1000: room 1002: occupant 1004: tintable window 1006: control system 1008 : multi-sensor device 1010 : building model 1012 : behavior model 1102 : instructional model 1103 : behavior model 1106 : raw sensor values 1108 : predicted sensor values 1110 : user input 1112 : schedule information 1114 : Direct and/or Indirect Feedback 1116: Predicted User Preferences 1202: First Behavioral Model 1204: User Feedback 1206: Tinable Windows 1208: Secondary Behavioral Model 1210: User Feedback 1212: Actionable Information 1215: Mobile Phone 1216: communication path 1302: user interface 1304: tintable window; window 1306: user interface 1308: behavior model 1310: sensor 1311: frame part 1312: sky sensor 1402: user interface 1404: tintable window 1406: input data; input 1408: behavior model 1502: user interface 1504: user interface 1506: user interface 1508: user interface 1602: user interface 1604: user interface 1701: box 1702: box 1703: box 1801 :Block 1802:Block 1803:Block 1804:Block 1901:Block 1902:Block 1903:Block 2001:Block 2002:Block 2003:Block 2004:Block 2005:Block 2006:Block 2007:Block 2101:Block 2102:Block 2103:Block 2104: block 2105: block 2106: block 2201: block 2202: block 2203: block 2301: network 2303: network window controller 2305: facility management system 2311: user device 2319: user 2400: closed body; building 2401: processor 2402: digital twin 2403: network link; network 2404: network link; pane 2405: interactive target; target; interactive device 2406: virtual object; virtual device; pane 2407: handheld Control; Handheld Controller 2408: Virtual Handheld Controller; Internal Volume 2409: Digital Beam 2410: Intersection Point; ECD 2412: Electrochromic (“EC”) Stack; EC Stack 2414: Transparent Conductive Oxide (TCO) Layer 2416: TCO layer 2418: spacer 2505: donor antenna 2505a: roof donor antenna; roof antenna; donor antenna; roof donor antenna 2505b: roof donor antenna; roof antenna; donor antenna; roof donor antenna 2507 : sky sensor; multi-sensor device 2509: physical line; high-speed line 2511: central office 2513: control panel 2519: data carrying line 2521: trunk line 2523: device collective 2525: antenna 2802: ramp to drive stage 2804: Drive Phase 2806: Ramp to Hold Phase 2808: Hold Phase 2900: Block 2901: Block 2902: Block 2903: Block 2904: Block 3000: Control System 3001: Table 3200: Diagram 3250: Diagram 3DM: 3D Facility Model C: Height D: Width E: Distance I: Corresponding Current I _Act : Actual Current Level I _Leak : Leakage Current S1: First Surface S2: Second Surface; Surface S3: First Surface S4: Second Surface t ₀ : Time t ₁ : Time t ₂ : time t ₃ : time V _App1 : voltage V _App2 : voltage V _Drive : maximum drive value; constant voltage V _Eff : effective applied voltage V _Hold : holding voltage; constant voltage V _OD : overdrive voltage

The novel features of the invention are set forth in detail in the appended claims. A better understanding of the features and advantages of the present invention will be obtained by reference to the following description of illustrative embodiments utilizing the principles of the invention and the accompanying drawings (also referred to herein as "Fig./Figs.") ,in: [Figure 1] A perspective view showing an enclosure (e.g., a building) and a control system; [Figure 2] Schematically depicts the processing system; [Figure 3] shows the block diagram of the example main controller (MC); [Figure 4] shows the block diagram of the example network controller (NC); [Figure 5] Depict the instance control; [Figure 6] shows the device including the sensor collective and its components and connectivity options; [ Fig. 7 ] is a schematic diagram of an example of a building and a building management system (BMS). [FIG. 8] is a diagram depicting the general system architecture of the systems and users involved in maintaining a clear sky model on a cloud network and controlling a building's tintable windows based on data derived from outputs from the model, according to various embodiments. schematic diagram. [Fig. 9] An explanatory example of the flow of data communicated between system components. [Fig. 10] Schematically depicts the use of behavioral models. [Fig. 11] Schematic depicting the interaction of the various layers of the control assembly. [Fig. 12] Schematically depicts the use of behavioral models. [Figure 13] illustrates the use of direct and indirect feedback in relation to the behavioral model. [FIG. 14] illustrates the use of user feedback in relation to the behavioral model. [Figure 15] shows the sample user interface. [Figure 16] shows the sample user interface. [ Fig. 17 ] is a flowchart of the control method. [ Fig. 18 ] is a flowchart of the control method. [ Fig. 19 ] is a flowchart of the control method. [ Fig. 20 ] is a flowchart of the control method. [ Fig. 21 ] is a flowchart of the control method. [ Fig. 22 ] is a flowchart of the control method. [ FIG. 23 ] is a schematic illustration of a system of a remote device for presenting a user interface of an application program controlling a device on a network. [FIG. 24] depicts an enclosure communicatively coupled to its digital twin representation; [Figure 25] Schematically shows buildings and networks. [Figure 26] Schematically shows the electrochromic device; [FIG. 27] A cross-sectional view showing an example electrochromic window; [Figure 28] shows the voltage distribution changing with time; [Fig. 29] A flowchart showing the control method; [Fig. 30] shows descriptions of various control system components and the like; [Figure 31] Displaying the operations and related information related to the simulation program; and [FIG. 32] A graph showing sensor values as a function of time.

Figures and components therein may not be drawn to scale. Various components of the drawings described herein may not be drawn to scale.

100: Control System Architecture

102:IGU

104: local controller; window controller

106: floor controller; network controller

108: Main controller

110: External source

112: Communication Arrow

114: Communication Arrow

118: Communication Arrow

120: database

122: Communication Arrow

124: Building Management System (BMS)

150: closed body

Claims (67)

A method for controlling a facility, the method comprising: receiving an input from a user indicating that a first state of a device of the facility is to be changed to a second state, the input being received over a network; predicting a third state of the device at a future time at least in part by using a machine learning model that takes into account the input from the user; and (I) proposing the third state and/or (II) adjusting the device to the third state at the future time. The method of claim 1, wherein the input is received via an application program executing on a user device of the user. The method of claim 2, wherein the third state is proposed to the user via the application program executed on the user device. The method as claimed in claim 1, wherein proposing the third state comprises (a) proposing to adjust the device to the third state at the future time, and/or (b) proposing at a plurality of A future time adjusts the device to the third state, the input being received under the set of conditions. The method of claim 4, further comprising providing a user response to the suggestion to the machine learning model. The method of claim 1, wherein the machine learning model constructs a training sample based at least in part on the input received, and wherein the training sample can be used to generate future predictions by the machine learning model. The method of claim 6, wherein the facility is a first facility, wherein the user is a first user, and wherein the future forecasts (i) relate to a second facility other than the first facility, and and/or (ii) relates to a second user other than the first user. The method of claim 1, wherein the device is a tintable window. The method according to claim 1, wherein the device is an environmental conditioning system component, a security system component, a health system component, an electrical system component, a communication system component, and/or a people transmission system component. The method of claim 9, wherein the people conveying system includes an elevator. The method of claim 9, wherein the environmental conditioning system comprises an HVAC component or a lighting system component. The method of claim 9, wherein the communication system includes a transparent media display. The method of claim 9, wherein the transparent media display (i) comprises a transparent organic light emitting diode array, and/or (ii) is operatively coupled to a tintable window. The method of claim 1, wherein the input indicates a user request to overwrite the first state of the device with the second state of the device. The method of claim 1, wherein the input is received under a set of conditions, and wherein adjusting the device to the third state at the future time is in response to detecting that the set of conditions occurs at the future time. The method of claim 1, wherein proposing the third state includes proposing the third state to a user other than the user from whom the input was received. The method of claim 1, wherein the third state is equal to the first state or the second state. The method of claim 1, wherein the machine learning model considers the input at least in part by causing the device to adjust to the third state at the future time. The method of claim 1, wherein the machine learning model considers the input at least in part by determining that one or more parameters associated with the input match one or more of the following: (i) by the machine learning model A rule-based pattern is generated, and/or (ii) an heuristic used by the machine learning model. The method of claim 19, wherein the one or more parameters include timing information, user identifier information, building type information associated with the facility, and/or sensor information. The method of claim 20, wherein the sensor information indicates sunlight penetration depth, vertical and/or horizontal shading, and/or light level. The method of claim 20, wherein the sensor information is indicative of a level of activity and/or a level of occupancy in an enclosure of the facility. The method of claim 1, wherein the machine learning model further considers a position of the user within and/or relative to the facility. The method of claim 23, wherein the location of the user within the facility is determined based at least in part on geolocation techniques, wherein the geolocation techniques optionally include radio frequency (RF) transmissions and/or sensing, and Wherein the radio frequency optically comprises ultra-wideband (UWB) frequencies. The method of claim 23, wherein the device is identified based at least in part on the location of the user within the facility. An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one processor configured to (I) be operatively coupled to a network and ((II) perform the methods or directs the execution of any of those methods. An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one processor configured to: operationally coupled to a network; receiving or directing receipt of an input from a user indicating that a first state of a device of the facility is to change to a second state, the input being received over the network; receiving or directing receipt of information indicative of a predicted third state for the device at a future time, wherein the predicted third state is determined by a machine learning model considering the input from the user; and (I) proposing or guiding proposing to transition the device into the third state presented to the user, and/or (II) receiving or guiding receipt of an indication that the device has been adjusted to the third state. A non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility which when read by one or more processors operatively coupled to a network cause the one or A plurality of processors performing operations comprising performing any of the methods of claims 1 to 25 or directing the execution of any of the methods. A system for controlling a facility, the system comprising: A network configured to: a device operatively coupled to the facility; An input is transmitted from a user indicating that a first state of the device of the facility is to change to a second state, the input being received over the network. transmitting a prediction for a third state of the device at a future time, wherein the prediction is determined at least in part by using a machine learning model that considers the input from the user; and Transmitting (I) a proposal for the third state and/or (II) an instruction to adjust the device to the third state at the future time. An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one controller configured to: a device operatively coupled to the facility; adjusting the device of the facility to the first state of a plurality of states including a first state, a second state, and a third state or an adjustment to direct the device to the first state; and Adjusting the device to the third state or directing the device to the third state at a future time, wherein the third state at the future time is by considering instructions from a user of the device of the facility The first state is predicted by a machine learning model of an input that will change to a second state, the input being received via a network. Non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility that when read by one or more processors of the device operatively coupled to the facility cause the One or more processors perform operations including: a device operatively coupled to the facility; adjusting a device of the facility to the first state of a plurality of states including a first state, a second state, and a third state or causing adjustment of the device to the first state; and adjusting the device to the third state or causing adjustment of the device to the third state at a future time, wherein at the future time the third state is determined by taking into account instructions from a user of the device of the facility The first state is predicted by a machine learning model of an input that will change to a second state, the input being received via a network. A method for controlling a facility, the method comprising: obtaining an input from a user indicating a preference associated with a present state of a device of the facility under a set of conditions, the input being obtained over a network; updating a database to include the input by the user; identifying an action to be associated with the set of conditions based at least in part on the database; and One or more signals associated with the action are transmitted over the network. The method of claim 32, wherein the input includes feedback from the user regarding the current state of the device. The method of claim 32, wherein the action comprises adjusting the device to a different state than the present state at a future time. The method of claim 32, wherein the action comprises proposing to adjust the device to a different state than the present state at a future time. The method of claim 35, wherein the proposed adjustment is provided to a user other than the user from which the input was obtained. The method of claim 32, wherein the action to be associated with the set of conditions is identified at least in part by identifying (i) a rule-based pattern and/or (ii) heuristics associated with the set of conditions. The method of claim 37, wherein the set of conditions includes timing information, user identifier information, building type information associated with the facility, and/or sensor information. The method of claim 38, wherein the sensor information indicates sunlight penetration depth, vertical and/or horizontal shading, and/or light level. The method of claim 32, wherein the action is identified based at least in part on input obtained from a plurality of users other than the user. The method of claim 32, wherein the action is identified based at least in part on input obtained in relation to a plurality of enclosures of the facility, a plurality of facilities other than the facility, or any combination thereof. The method of claim 32, wherein the device is a tintable window, and wherein the current state includes a current tint level of the tintable window. The method of claim 42, wherein the one or more signals transmitted over the network cause the tintable window to transition to a different hue level associated with the identified action. The method of claim 32, wherein the device is: (i) an environmental conditioning system component, (ii) a security system component, (iii) a health system component, (iv) an electrical system component, (v) a communication system components, and/or (vi) a people conveyor system component. The method of claim 32, further comprising: (i) obtaining a user response to the identified action; and (II) updating the database to include the user response to the identified action. An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one processor configured to: a device operatively coupled to the facility; obtaining or directing the obtaining of an input from a user indicating a preference associated with a present state of the device of the facility under a set of conditions, the input being obtained over a network; transmitting an indication of the input by the user, the transmission causing a database to be updated to include the input by the user; and One or more signals associated with an action are received, wherein the action is associated with the set of conditions, and wherein the action has been identified based at least in part on the database. A non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility which when read by one or more processors operatively coupled to a network cause the one or A plurality of processors performing operations comprising performing or directing the execution of any of the methods of claims 32 to 45. A system for controlling a facility, the system comprising: A network configured to: a device operatively coupled to the facility; transmitting an input obtained from a user indicating a preference associated with a present state of a device of the facility under a set of conditions, the input obtained over the network; transmitting an indication of the input to a database, the transmission causing the database to be updated to include the input by the user; transmitting an identification of an action, wherein the action is associated with the set of conditions, and wherein the action is identified based at least in part on the database; and Transmits one or more signals associated with the action. An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one controller configured to: a device operatively coupled to the facility; adjustments to the equipment of the facility to a present state or adjustments to bring the equipment to the present state; and receiving or directing the receipt of one or more signals associated with an action, wherein the action is associated with a set of conditions and identified based at least in part on a database, and wherein the action is responsive to indications in the A user input of a preference associated with the present state of the device of the facility under a set of conditions is identified, the input obtained via a network. A non-transitory computer-readable program of instructions for controlling a facility which, when read by one or more processors, causes the one or more processors to execute a program comprising: operate: a device operatively coupled to the facility; results in the adjustment of the installation of the facility to a present state; and receiving or directing the receipt of one or more signals associated with an action, wherein the action is associated with a set of conditions and identified based at least in part on a database, and wherein the action is responsive to indications in the A user input of a preference associated with the present state of the device of the facility under a set of conditions is identified, the input obtained via a network. A method for controlling a facility, the method comprising: receiving an input from a user indicating a preference associated with a state of a device of the facility, the input being received over a network; determining whether to change the state of the device based at least in part on (i) the input and (ii) a user rights scheme, whether changing the state of the device results in a positive determination or results in a negative determination; and The positive decision is used to change the state of the device. The method of claim 51, wherein the input is a feedback of a suggested state of the device. The method of claim 51, wherein the positive determination occurs in response to determining that the input indicates a change in the state of the device of the facility and that the user has authority to change the state of the device. The method of claim 51, wherein the negative determination occurs in response to determining that the input does not indicate a change in the state of the device of the facility and/or the user does not have authority to change the current state of the device. The method of claim 51, wherein the device is a tintable window, and wherein the state of the device comprises a tint state of the tintable window. The method of claim 51, wherein in response to the determination of whether to change the state of the device results in the negative determination, the state of the device is not changed. The method of claim 51, wherein the device is an environmental conditioning system component, a security system component, a health system component, an electrical system component, a communication system component, and/or a people transport system component. The method of claim 51, wherein the user rights scheme changes over time. The method of claim 51, wherein the user permissions scheme indicates permissions for the user that vary based at least in part on a geographic location of the user relative to the facility. The method of claim 51, wherein the user permissions scheme is based at least in part on a role of the user within an organization. The method of claim 51, wherein the user permissions scheme is based at least in part on input from a plurality of users other than the user. The method of claim 61, wherein the user permission scheme indication does not allow the user to change the state of the device in response to determining that a majority of the plurality of users disagree with the input indicating the preference. An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one processor configured to: a device operatively coupled to the facility and to a network; receiving or directing receipt of an input from a user indicating a preference associated with a state of the device of the facility, the input being received over the network; determining whether to change the state of the device or directing a determination whether to change the state of the device based at least in part on (i) the input and (ii) a user rights scheme, the determination of whether changing the state of the device results in A positive determination or results in a negative determination; and Changing or directing a change in the state of the device based at least in part on the positive determination. A non-transitory computer readable program instructions for controlling a facility which when read by one or more processors operatively coupled to a network cause the one or The plurality of processors performs operations comprising performing or directing the execution of any of the methods of claims 51 to 62. A system for controlling a facility, the system comprising: A network configured to: transmitting an input from a user indicating a preference associated with a state of a device of the facility, the input being received over the network; transmitting a determination of whether to change the state of the device, wherein the determination is based at least in part on (i) the input and (ii) a user rights scheme, the determination of whether changing the state of the device results in a positive determination or results in a negative determination; and The positive decision is used to transmit a command to change the state of the device. An apparatus for controlling a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one controller configured to: a device operatively coupled to the facility and to a network; an adjustment to adjust the device to a state of the device or to induce the device to the state; Determining whether to change the state of the device or guiding a determination of whether to change the state of the device based at least in part on (i) an input from a user and (ii) a user permissions scheme, whether to change the state of the device the determination of the state results in a positive determination or results in a negative determination, the input is received over the network; and Changing or directing a change in the state of the device based at least in part on the positive determination. A non-transitory computer-readable program of instructions for controlling a facility which, when read by one or more processors, causes the one or more processors to execute a program comprising: operate: a device operatively coupled to the facility and to a network; an adjustment to adjust the device to a state of the device or to induce the device to the state; Determining whether to change the state of the device or guiding a determination of whether to change the state of the device based at least in part on (i) an input from a user and (ii) a user permissions scheme, whether to change the state of the device The determination of the state results in a positive determination or results in a negative determination; and Changing or inducing a change in the state of the device based at least in part on the positive determination, the input is received over the network.

Images